FCC ID: ACJ-EYFMH Sewing Machine for household use

Operating Instructions Instructions dutilisation Manual de instrucciones Battery Operated Tool Outil fonctionnant sur batterie Herramienta con pilas Cordless Electronic Mechanical Pulse Wrench Sans fil Cl impulsion mcanique lectronique Inalmbrica Llave de impulso mecnica electrnica Model No.: EYFMH1WC EYFMH2WC EYFMH1WP EYFMH2WP Battery pack is not included. Le bloc batterie nest pas inclus. Batera no incluida. IMPORTANT WICHTIG Read and follow the safety and operating instructions before using this product. Do not use the wireless function outside the country where you purchased the product. Doing so may violate the local laws and regulations. Lesen Sie vor der Verwendung dieses Produktes die Sicherheitsanweisungen und die Bedienungsanleitung und befolgen Sie sie. Verwenden Sie die Drahtlos-Funktion nicht auerhalb des Landes, in dem Sie das Produkt erworben haben. Dies knnte gegen rtliche Gesetze und Vorschriften verstoen. IMPORTANT Lisez et suivez les instructions dutilisation et de scurit avant dutiliser ce produit. Nutilisez pas la fonction sans fil en dehors du pays o vous avez achet le produit. Cela pourrait enfreindre les lois et rglementations locales. IMPORTANTE Leggere e seguire le istruzioni per luso e di sicurezza prima di utilizzare questo prodotto. Non utilizzare la funzione wireless al di fuori del Paese in cui stato acquistato il prodotto. Ci potrebbe violare le leggi e i regolamenti locali. IMPORTANTE Lea y siga las instrucciones de seguridad y operacin antes de usar este aparato. No utilice la funcin inalmbrica fuera del pas donde adquiri el producto. Hacerlo podra infringir las leyes y normativas locales. EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 1 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 1 2023/11/28 14:23:24 2023/11/28 14:23:24 Table of Contents 1. BEFORE USE 1.1 GETTING STARTED .................................................................................................................3 1.1.1 OBTAINING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE .......................................................3 1.1.2 OBTAINING THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .........................................................4 1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..........................................................................................................5 1.2.1 ADDITIONAL SAFETY RULES .....................................................................................5 1.2.2 INTENDED USE ............................................................................................................7 1.3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................8 1.4 EXTRA-COST OPTIONS .........................................................................................................10 1.5 WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................................................................................................11 1.6 CHARGING ..............................................................................................................................12 1.7 TOOL SETUPS BEFORE USE ...............................................................................................16 2. OPERATION 2.1 BASIC OPERATION ................................................................................................................17 2.1.1 OPERATION MODE OF THE TOOL ...........................................................................17 2.1.2 TORQUE CONTROL FUNCTION ................................................................................18 2.1.3 HOW TO USE ..............................................................................................................19 2.1.4 TIGHTENING CONFIRMATION LAMP AND COMMUNICATION LAMP ...................21 2.1.5 CONTROL PANEL FUNCTIONS .................................................................................23 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE ..........................................................................25 2.2.1 INSTALLING AND UPDATING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE ........................25 2.2.2 UNINSTALLING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE ...............................................27 2.2.3 REPAIRING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE .....................................................28 2.2.4 STARTING/EXITING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE ........................................29 2.2.5 CONNECTING/DISCONNECTING THE TOOL ...........................................................30 2.2.6 SCREEN LAYOUT OF THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE .....................................34 2.2.7 MANAGING THE TOOL FROM THE TOOL LIST .......................................................36 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL .........................................................40 2.2.9 PARAMETER LIST ......................................................................................................58 2.2.10 SETTING OPTIONS FOR THE TOOL .......................................................................67 2.2.11 INITIALIZING CONFIGURATION OF THE TOOL .....................................................70 2.2.12 DISPLAYING AND SAVING THE HISTORY LOG .....................................................71 2.2.13 HISTORY LOG ITEM LIST ........................................................................................78 2.2.14 MANAGING THE DATA FOLDER .............................................................................83 2.2.15 SETTING THE DISPLAY OF THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE .........................84 2.2.16 HELP FUNCTION ......................................................................................................85 3. SPECIFICATIONS 3.1 CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATIONS OF THE TOOL ..............................................................86 3.2 SPECIFICATIONS OF THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE .................................................88 3.3 PAIRING WITH THE CONTROLLER ......................................................................................90 3.4 PRECAUTIONS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION ..........................................................93 4. MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 4.1 CLEANING AND STORAGE ...................................................................................................94 4.2 BATTERY PACK ......................................................................................................................95 4.3 ERROR CODES ......................................................................................................................97 4.3.1 ERROR CODES ON CONTROL PANEL ....................................................................97 4.3.2 ERROR MESSAGES OF HISTORY LOGS .................................................................98 4.4 LICENCE TERMS ..................................................................................................................101 Characters written in red show those that are not mentioned in a brief (printed) version of Operating Instructions.

- 2 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 2 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 2 2023/11/28 14:23:24 2023/11/28 14:23:24 EN 1.1 GETTING STARTED 1.1.1 OBTAINING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE To use this product, it is necessary to set its parameters using the dedicated software (Tool Manager). First, obtain the Tool Manager software by following the procedure below. Preparation: Prepare a PC or tablet with the supported OS installed. Supported OS: Windows10 Home, Windows10 Pro, Windows10 Enterprise Access the following download site and download the installer of the Tool Manager software.

(For how to install the Tool Manager software, Refer to 2.2.1 ) The Tool Manager software download site. https://www.panasonic-powertools.eu/en/construction/documents.htm Please use the latest version.

- 3 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 3 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 3 2023/11/28 14:23:24 2023/11/28 14:23:24 EN 1.1 GETTING STARTED 1.1.2 OBTAINING THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Access the following download site and download the Operating Instructions of EYFMH1WC or EYFMH2WC. For full version Operating Instructions, please refer to the web site. https://www.panasonic-powertools.eu/en/construction/documents.htm

- 4 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 4 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 4 2023/11/28 14:23:24 2023/11/28 14:23:24 EN 1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1.2.1 GENERAL POWER TOOL SAFETY WARNINGS WARNING Read all safety warnings, instructions, illustrations and specifications provided with this power tool. Failure to follow all instructions listed below may result in electric shock, fire and/or serious injury. The term power tool in the warnings refers to your mains-operated (corded) power tool or battery-operated (cordless) power tool. Save all warnings and instructions for future reference. 1) Work Area Safety a) Keep work area clean and well lit. Cluttered or dark areas invite accidents. b) Do not operate power tools in explosive atmospheres, such as in the presence of flammable liquids, gases or dust. Power tools create sparks which may ignite the dust or fumes. c) Keep children and bystanders away while operating a power tool. Distractions can cause you to lose control. 2) Electrical Safety a) Power tool plugs must match the outlet. Never modify the plug in any way. Do not use any adapter plugs with earthed (grounded) power tools. Unmodified plugs and matching outlets will reduce risk of electric shock. b) Avoid body contact with earthed or grounded surfaces such as pipes, radiators, ranges and refrigerators. There is an increased risk of electric shock if your body is earthed or grounded. c) Do not expose power tools to rain or wet conditions. Water entering a power tool will increase the risk of electric shock. d) Do not abuse the cord. Never use the cord for carrying, pulling or unplugging the power tool. Keep cord away from heat, oil, sharp edges or moving parts. Damaged or entangled cords increase the risk of electric shock. e) When operating a power tool outdoors, use an extension cord suitable for outdoor use. Use of a cord suitable for outdoor use reduces the risk of electric shock. f) If operating a power tool in a damp location is unavoidable, use a residual current device (RCD) protected supply. Use of an RCD reduces the risk of electric shock.

- 5 -

EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 5 EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 5 2023/09/21 15:03:59 2023/09/21 15:03:59 EN 1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1.2.1 GENERAL POWER TOOL SAFETY WARNINGS 3) Personal Safety a) Stay alert, watch what you are doing and use common sense when operating a power tool. Do not use a power tool while you are tired or under the influence of drugs, alcohol or medication. A moment of inattention while operating power tools may result in serious personal injury. b) Use personal protective equipment. Always wear eye protection. Protective equipment such as dust mask, non-skid safety shoes, hard hat, or hearing protection used for appropriate conditions will reduce personal injuries. c) Prevent unintentional starting. Ensure the switch is in the off-position before connecting to power source and/or battery pack, picking up or carrying the tool. Carrying power tools with your finger on the switch or energising power tools that have the switch on invites accidents. d) Remove any adjusting key or wrench before turning the power tool on. A wrench or a key left attached to a rotating part of the power tool may result in personal injury. e) Do not overreach. Keep proper footing and balance at all times. This enables better control of the power tool in unexpected situations. f) Dress properly. Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry. Keep your hair, clothing and gloves away from moving parts. Loose clothes, jewelry or long hair can be caught in moving parts. g) If devices are provided for the connection of dust extraction and collection facilities, ensure these are connected and properly used. Use of dust collection can reduce dust-related hazards. h) Do not let familiarity gained from frequent use of tools allow you to become complacent and ignore tool safety principles. A careless action can cause severe injury within a fraction of a second. 4) Power Tool Use and Care a) Do not force the power tool. Use the correct power tool for your application. The correct power tool will do the job better and safer at the rate for which it was designed. b) Do not use the power tool if the switch does not turn it on and off. Any power tool that cannot be controlled with the switch is dangerous and must be repaired. c) Disconnect the plug from the power source and/or remove the battery pack, if detachable, from the power tool before making any adjustments, changing accessories, or storing power tools. Such preventive safety measures reduce the risk of starting the power tool accidentally.

- 6 -

EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 6 EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 6 2023/09/21 15:03:59 2023/09/21 15:03:59 EN 1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1.2.1 GENERAL POWER TOOL SAFETY WARNINGS d) Store idle power tools out of the reach of children and do not allow persons unfamiliar with the power tool or these instructions to operate the power tool. Power tools are dangerous in the hands of untrained users. e) Maintain power tools and accessories. Check for misalignment or binding of moving parts, breakage of parts and any other condition that may affect the power tools operation. If damaged, have the power tool repaired before use. Many accidents are caused by poorly maintained power tools. f) Keep cutting tools sharp and clean. Properly maintained cutting tools with sharp cutting edges are less likely to bind and are easier to control. g) Use the power tool, accessories and tool bits etc., in accordance with these instructions, taking into account the working conditions and the work to be performed. Use of the power tool for operations different from those intended could result in a hazardous situation. h) Keep handles and grasping surfaces dry, clean and free from oil and grease. Slippery handles and grasping surfaces do not allow for safe handling and control of the tool in unexpected situations. 5) Battery Tool Use and Care a) Recharge only with the charger specified by the manufacturer. A charger that is suitable for one type of battery pack may create a risk of fire when used with another battery pack. b) Use power tools only with specifically designated battery packs. Use of any other battery packs may create a risk of injury and fire. c) When battery pack is not in use, keep it away from other metal objects, like paper clips, coins, keys, nails, screws or other small metal objects, that can make a connection from one terminal to another. Shorting the battery terminals together may cause burns or a fire. d) Under abusive conditions, liquid may be ejected from the battery; avoid contact. If contact accidentally occurs, flush with water. If liquid contacts eyes, additionally seek medical help. Liquid ejected from the battery may cause irritation or burns. e) Do not use a battery pack or tool that is damaged or modified. Damaged or modified batteries may exhibit unpredictable behavior resulting in fire, explosion or risk of injury.

- 7 -

EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 7 EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 7 2023/09/21 15:03:59 2023/09/21 15:03:59 EN 1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1.2.1 GENERAL POWER TOOL SAFETY WARNINGS f) Do not expose a battery pack or tool to fire or excessive temperature. Exposure to fire or temperature above 130 C (266 F) may cause explosion. g) Follow all charging instructions and do not charge the battery pack or tool outside the temperature range specified in the instructions. Charging improperly or at temperatures outside the specified range may damage the battery and increase the risk of fire. 6) Service a) Have your power tool serviced by a qualified repair person using only identical replacement parts. This will ensure that the safety of power tool is maintained. b) Never service damaged battery packs. Service of battery packs should only be performed by the manufacturer or authorized service providers. Screwdrivers/impact wrenches safety warnings Hold the power tool by insulated gripping surfaces, when performing an operation where the fastener may contact hidden wiring. Fasteners contacting a live wire may make exposed metal parts of the power tool live and could give the operator an electric shock.

- 8 -

EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 8 EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 8 2023/09/21 15:03:59 2023/09/21 15:03:59 EN 1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1.2.1 ADDITIONAL SAFETY RULES 1) Wear ear protectors when using the tool for extended periods. Prolonged exposure to high intensity noise can cause hearing loss. 2) Be aware that this tool is always in an operating condition, since it does not have to be plugged into an electrical outlet. 3) Do not touch the rotating parts to avoid injury. 4) Do not use the tool continuously for a long period of time. Stop using the tool from time to time to avoid temperature rise and heat overload of the motor. 5) Do not drop the tool. 6) Make sure to push the USB connector cover all the way in before starting work. Meaning Symbol V Volts Direct current n0 No load speed

...min-1 Revolutions or reciprocations per minutes Ah Electrical capacity of battery pack To reduce the risk of injury, user must read and understand operating instructions. Do not incinerate or heat battery pack. Do not charge or use under conditions of high temperature. Do not expose to high temperatures. Do not disassemble or modify. Do not expose to rain or water.

- 9 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 5 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 5 2023/11/28 14:23:25 2023/11/28 14:23:25 EN 1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1.2.1 ADDITIONAL SAFETY RULES WARNING Do not use other than the Panasonic battery packs that are designed for use with this rechargeable tool. Panasonic is not responsible for any damage or accident caused by the use of recycled or counterfeit battery pack. Do not dispose of the battery pack in a fire, or expose it to excessive heat. Do not allow metal objects to touch the battery pack terminals. Do not carry or store the battery pack in the same container as nails or similar metal objects. Do not charge the battery pack in a high-temperature location, such as next to a fire or in direct sunlight. Otherwise, the battery may overheat, catch fire, or explode. After removing the battery pack from the tool or the charger, always reattach the pack cover. Otherwise, the battery contacts could be shorted, leading to a risk of fire. When the Battery Pack Has Deteriorated, Replace It with a New One. Continued use of a damaged battery pack may result in heat generation, ignition or battery rupture. To prevent leakage, overheating, smoke generation, fire, and rupturing from occurring, follow these instructions when handling our rechargeable power tools (tool main body/

battery pack/charger).

- Do not allow material cuttings or dust to fall onto the battery pack.

- Before storing, remove any material cuttings and dust from the battery pack, fit red plastic terminal cover, then place separately from metal objects (screws, nails, etc.) in tool case. Damage caused by loose objects in the case will not be covered by warranty. Do not handle the rechargeable power tools in the following way.

( There is a hazard of smoke generation, fire, and rupturing)

- Use or leave in places exposed to rain or moisture

- Use submerging in water

- 10 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 6 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 6 2023/11/28 14:23:25 2023/11/28 14:23:25 EN 1.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1.2.2 INTENDED USE This tool is a Cordless Mechanical Pulse Wrench and can be used to tighten bolts, nuts, and screws. Additionally, it provides a torque control function that automatically stops tool operation when a preset load is reached to deliver consistent tightening torque. IMPROPER USE The use of the tool other than INTENDED USE is dangerous and must be avoided. The tool must not be used for the purposes such as the following;

to mix paint or building materials, polishing, grinding, sharpening, engraving. RESIDUAL RISK Some residual risks remain even with proper use of the tool such as the following;

contact with the rotating bit contact with the sharp edges of material or something.

- 11 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 7 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 7 2023/11/28 14:23:25 2023/11/28 14:23:25 EN 1.3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Tool Square drive (retainer ring and pin) Square drive (pin-detent type) Retainer ring Pin-detent

(EYFMH1WC / EYFMH2WC)

(EYFMH1WP / EYFMH2WP) Sensor block Note The QR code on the lower part of the sensor block is our manufacturing identification mark. Tightening confirmation lamp Refer to 2.1.4 Communication lamp Refer to 2.1.4 Vent LED light Refer to 2.1.5 Trigger switch Refer to 2.1.3 Forward/Reverse lever Refer to 2.1.3 Tool hanger mounting hole USB connector cover USB connector

(USB Type-C) Refer to 2.2.5 Control Panel Refer to Next Page Alignment mark USB Type-C is a trademark of USB Implementers Forum.

- 12 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 8 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 8 2023/11/28 14:23:25 2023/11/28 14:23:25 EN 1.3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION Control Panel Refer to 2.1.5 Display Battery indication lamp LED light ON/OFF button Accessory USB cable 1 m EYFMH1XL701W

- 13 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 9 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 9 2023/11/28 14:23:25 2023/11/28 14:23:25 EN 1.4 EXTRA-COST OPTIONS List of Extra-cost Options Battery pack Model No. Storage battery Battery voltage Battery charger Model No. Rating Weight Charging time EYFB41 EYFB43 Li-ion battery 14.4 V DC(3.6 V/4 cells) 14.4 V DC(3.6 V/8 cells) EY0L82 See the rating plate on the bottom of the charger. 0.93 kg EYFB41 Usable: 35 min. Full: 40 min. EYFB43 Usable: 45 min. Full: 60 min. USB cable 1 m EYFMH1XL701W (1) Tool protector EYFA14-A (blue), D (orange), G (green), H (gray), Y (yellow) Battery protector EYFA04-H (gray) For EYFB43 EYFA06-H (gray) For EYFB41 Tool hanger EYFA40 Retainer ring (C-ring) EZ7552K0187 (1) Controller EYFRW2 1 You can purchase this as a repair part. CAUTION The tool hanger is for a balancer only. If any strong force or shock is applied, it may break to cause the tool to fall. Note Please purchase the battery pack, EYFB41 or EYFB43. Please purchase the retainer ring (C-ring), EZ7552K0187 (EYFMH1WC, EYFMH2WC).

- 14 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 10 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 10 2023/11/28 14:23:25 2023/11/28 14:23:25 EN 1.5 WIRING DIAGRAM The tool can be used by being connected to external devices as shown in the connection diagram below. Programming software Tool Manager (Model No. : EYFSW102)

[Compatible OS]

Windows10 Home/Windows10 Pro/Windows10 Enterprise

[Features]

View work results, Manage work result files Set parameters, Manage parameter files How to access: Refer to 1.1.1 Connection example PC for configuration Wireless communication Wired communication, direct connection To USB terminal (Type-A) USB cable (accessory) To USB terminal (Type-C) This unit Controller

(EYFRW2) For details on the controller, see the Operating Instructions supplied with it. USB Type-C is a trademark of USB Implementers Forum.

- 15 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 11 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 11 2023/11/28 14:23:26 2023/11/28 14:23:26 EN 1.6 CHARGING Before Charging You can charge a sliding lithium-ion battery pack.

(Charging EYFB41 or EYFB43) Install a battery charger in a place with a temperature of 5 C to 40 C, and charge the battery pack that is close to the temperature of the charging place. If the battery pack temperature is 5 C or below or significantly different from the charging place temperature, there may be a lack of charging. Leave it in that place for 1 hour or more before charging. Attention If you have charged two battery packs in a row, stop charging for about 30 minutes. Wait for the battery charger temperature to fall before charging. If you do not hear a fan running just after inserting a battery pack, the battery charger may be potentially out of order. Request repair immediately. Note The battery charger controls its cooling fan according to the battery pack temperature and the charging mode. The fan operation changes during charging, which is not a failure. Even after pulling out the power plug, the power lamp may be lit for about 10 seconds, which is not a failure. Temperatures mentioned in this Operating Instructions are for reference. Actually, they may vary somewhat depending on conditions.

- 16 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 12 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 12 2023/11/28 14:23:26 2023/11/28 14:23:26 EN 1.6 CHARGING How to Charge 1 Plug the charger into the AC outlet. Note Sparks may be produced when the plug is inserted into the AC power supply, but this is not a problem in terms of safety. 2 Insert the battery pack firmly into the charger. Line up the alignment marks and place the battery onto the dock on the charger. Slide forward in the direction of the arrow. Alignment marks 3 During charging, the charging lamp will be lit. When charging is completed, an internal electronic switch will automatically be triggered to prevent overcharging. Charging will not start if the battery pack is warm (for example, immediately after heavy-duty operation). The orange standby lamp will be flashing until the battery cools down. Charging will then begin automatically. 4 The charge lamp (green) will flash slowly once the battery is approximate ly 80% charged. 5 When charging is completed, the charging lamp in green color will turn off. 6 If the temperature of the battery pack is 0 C or less, charging takes longer to fully charge the battery pack than the standard charging time. Even when the battery is fully charged, it will have approximately 50% of the power of a fully charged battery at normal operating temperature.

- 17 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 13 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 13 2023/11/28 14:23:26 2023/11/28 14:23:26 EN 1.6 CHARGING 7 Consult an authorized dealer if the charging lamp (green) does not turn off. 8 If a fully charged battery pack is inserted into the charger again, the charging lamp lights up. After several minutes, the charging lamp in green color will turn off. 9 Remove the battery pack while the battery pack release button is held up. LAMP INDICATIONS Charging is completed. (Full charge.) Battery is approximately 80% charged. Now charging. Charger is plugged into the AC outlet. Ready to charge.

(Green)

(Orange) Charging Status Lamp. Left: green Right: orange will be displayed. Battery pack is cool. The battery pack is being charged slowly to reduce the load on the battery. Battery pack is warm. Charging will begin when temperature of battery pack drops. If the temperature of the battery pack is -10 C or less, the charging status lamp (orange) will also start flashing. Charging will begin when the temperature of the battery pack goes up. Charging is not possible. Clogged with dust or malfunction of the battery pack. Turn off Illuminated Flashing

- 18 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 14 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 14 2023/11/28 14:23:26 2023/11/28 14:23:26 EN 1.6 CHARGING Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: To assure continued compliance, install and use in accordance with provided instructions. Use only the battery pack specified in the instructions. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

- 19 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 15 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 15 2023/11/28 14:23:26 2023/11/28 14:23:26 EN 1.7 TOOL SETUPS BEFORE USE 1 Hold the forward/reverse lever in the center to keep it in a switch lock position. Center Switch lock position 2 Attach a socket. Remove a rubber ring and a pin from the socket. Rubber ring Groove Pin Insert the socket into the tool.

(Align their hole positions.) Reversing the procedure , attach the pin and the rubber ring. Be sure to put the rubber ring so that the pin will not come out. The retainer ring (C-ring) is for temporary fixing. Be sure to use the pin and the rubber ring to fix the socket. If you use a socket that is worn or deformed, an anvil of the retainer ring (C-ring) type may not be inserted. 3 Aligning the alignment marks, attach the battery pack. Slide it until the red label is out of sight, and make sure that it is fixed and wont come off. Click Alignment mark Red label

- 20 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 16 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 16 2023/11/28 14:23:26 2023/11/28 14:23:26 EN 2.1 BASIC OPERATION 2.1.1 OPERATION MODE OF THE TOOL The tool operates in one of the following modes. The mode in which it is used now is shown on the display of the control panel. Display Display Mode name Mode details Stand Alone Mode This is a mode in which the tool operates according to the configured parameters registered in its inside. The history log data is recorded in the tools internal storage. The tool does not communicate with the controller. The Tool Manager software is used to change the setting to

[Stand Alone Mode]. Refer to 2.2.8 Wireless Communication Mode This is a mode in which the tool is controlled via wireless communication. The tool communicates with the controller to send the history log data and receive the configured parameters. Refer to 2.2.9 Operation Disable Mode The tool has been locked by an operation prohibition signal from the controller in the wireless communication mode. It will be unlocked by a release signal from the controller. Pairing mode This is a mode to check the pairing status. It can also be done on the controller. Refer to 3.3 Minimum Output Mode Offset Mode This is a mode in which to check whether torque control is available when the target torque is low. The tool is shut off at the minimum number of pulses. The Tool Manager software is used to change the setting to

[Minimum Output Mode]. It can also be done on the controller. Refer to 2.2.8 This is a mode in which to correct the calculated torque of the tool for the actual torque. The Tool Manager software is used to change the setting to

[Offset Mode]. It can also be done on the controller. Refer to 2.2.8 Factory Default Mode This is a mode in which the tool is in the factory default status. Select [Stand Alone Mode] or [Wireless Communication Mode]

in accordance with your purpose using the Tool Manager software before use.

- 21 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 17 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 17 2023/11/28 14:23:26 2023/11/28 14:23:26 EN 2.1 BASIC OPERATION 2.1.2 TORQUE CONTROL FUNCTION The tightening torque for the work target is calculated by the torque sensor of the tool. When the calculated torque value reaches the preset target value, the tool is supposed to stop (shut off) automatically.

(For how to set the Shut-Off Torque, Refer to 2.2.8 .) WARNING Make a daily management of torque performance. Otherwise, bolts will be loosened by torque change, causing an accident. CAUTION During work, the trigger switch should be pulled all the way in. If the trigger switch is not pulled in enough, torque control will not function and the tool will not stop automatically. At work where a load on the way is higher than the target torque, bolts may not be tightened up because the load on the way is judged to be the target torque. At work where members vary, the tightening torque may vary even at the same set torque. If you tighten the same bolt twice, overtightening may cause the bolt to break or the bolted member to deform. The tightening torque varies with the work conditions. Adjust it in the actual work. The bolt tightening torque might change according to the following factors. Bolt diameter (generally, as the diameter becomes large, the tightening torque will increase), torque coefficient (shown by the bolt manufacturer), grade, length, washer presence and type, etc. Length, quality of material, deterioration degree, use of universal joint, use of socket adapter, use of extension socket, etc. Quality of material, bearing surface finish, etc. Bolt Socket Condition of member to tighten Working method How you put the tool to a bolt, force that holds the tool, how you pull the trigger switch, etc.

- 22 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 18 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 18 2023/11/28 14:23:26 2023/11/28 14:23:26 EN 2.1 BASIC OPERATION 2.1.3 HOW TO USE 1 Choose forward or reverse with the forward/reverse lever, and turn on the trigger switch. Trigger switch pull-in operation may delay the startup of rotation for a moment, which is not a failure. In case of quick ON/OFF, the rotation startup will be late a little for that. If you keep pulling the trigger switch to make rotations continuously, the tool may come to an error (EA) stop automatically because the recordable data per work exceeds the upper limit. The operating temperature range of lithium-ion battery packs is 0 C to 40 C. If a cold battery pack that is 0 C or below is used as it is in cold regions etc., the tool may not operate normally. In this case, before use, leave the battery pack in a place that is 10 C or above for 1 hour or more to raise its temperature. After the temperature has risen, use the battery pack. Forward Reverse For about 1 second just after a battery pack is attached, trigger switch pull-in operation is not accepted. CAUTION Wait for the motor to stop, before operating the forward/reverse lever. Operating it while the motor has not stopped completely will cause a failure.

- 23 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 19 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 19 2023/11/28 14:23:27 2023/11/28 14:23:27 EN 2.1 BASIC OPERATION 2.1.3 HOW TO USE 2 See the tightening confirmation lamp display to check whether torque control has functioned. For the tightening confirmation lamp display, Refer to 2.1.4 . Note At reverse work, the tightening confirmation lamps do not light up. The lamps will go out when you pull the trigger switch. Tightening confirmation lamp To use the tool in a holder, select such a holder as will not interfere with the trigger switch of the tool. If the holder interferes with the trigger switch, the trigger switch will be pulled in to make the battery pack discharge electricity, causing a failure in the battery pack.

- 24 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 20 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 20 2023/11/28 14:23:27 2023/11/28 14:23:27 EN 2.1 BASIC OPERATION 2.1.4 TIGHTENING CONFIRMATION LAMP AND COMMUNICATION LAMP You can check the tightening result and the communication status by seeing the LED lamps on the tool. Tightening confirmation lamp Tightening Confirmation Lamp Display Lamp display Meaning of display Details Green Lit for 2 s

+ Buzzer (depending on the setting) Work judged OK The tightening work reached the set shut-

off torque successfully. Red Lit for 2 s

+ Buzzer (depending on the setting) Work judged NOK Tool error The tightening work did not reach the set shut-off torque. For the cause of incompletion, check the contents of the history log on the Tool Manager software. Refer to 2.2.12 If any error is shown on the control panel display, take action according to the error description. Refer to 4.3.1 Auto power-off functioning If the battery indication lamp is all blinking, replace the battery pack. Red Lit continuously

+ Buzzer Maintenance Interval Alarm Lock Mode Orange Blinking continuously

+ Buzzer Communication error The tool is locked because it reached the maintenance timing that was set in

[Maintenance Interval Alarm]. Also check that the setting value (1 to 99) and 0 are shown alternately on the control panel display. Refer to 2.2.10 Take action according to the error description shown on the control panel display. Refer to 4.3.1 Orange Lit continuously

+ Buzzer Out of wireless communication range Also check E9 shown on the control panel display. If it is correct, move into the wireless communication range.

- 25 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 21 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 21 2023/11/28 14:23:27 2023/11/28 14:23:27 EN 2.1 BASIC OPERATION 2.1.4 TIGHTENING CONFIRMATION LAMP AND COMMUNICATION LAMP You can check the tightening result and the communication status by seeing the LED lamps on the tool. Communication lamp Communication Lamp Display Lamp display Meaning of display Details Blue Blinking fast

(0.2 s cycle) Communicating Blue Lit continuously USB connected When the communication lamp is blinking fast, some communications have taken place inside the tool or between the tool and external devices. Do not pull out the USB cable or the battery pack until it goes out. While the tool is connected with the Tool Manager software on your PC or tablet, the communication lamp lights up. Blue Blue Blue Blinking fast

(0.2 s cycle) Pairing in progress The communication lamp blinks fast while pairing is in progress. Blinking slowly

(1 s cycle) Reconnection in progress The communication lamp blinks slowly while reconnection is in progress. Blinking

(0.2 s cycle) +

buzzer Pairing completed The communication lamp starts blinking slowly

(0.5 s cycle) after pairing is completed. After pairing is completed, the tool enters a Waiting for a wireless signal or a Wireless operation prohibited state at a command from the controller. Blue Blinking slowly

(1 s cycle) Waiting for a wireless signal The communication lamp blinks slowly while the tool is in the wireless communication mode. Off Wireless operation prohibited The tools operation is disabled by an operation prohibition signal from the controller.

- 26-

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 22 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 22 2023/11/28 14:23:27 2023/11/28 14:23:27 EN 2.1 BASIC OPERATION 2.1.5 CONTROL PANEL FUNCTIONS Power is in an OFF state when all the lamps on the control panel have gone out. Pull the trigger switch once to activate the tool before operating it. In the following cases, power will be in an OFF state to cut battery drain, and the LED light and all the displays will go out. Just after a battery pack is attached When you have operated nothing for the following time In [Stand Alone Mode]: About 5 minutes In [Wireless Communication Mode]: About 120 minutes When Tool Manager software is connected: About 20 minutes Utilizing the LED Light The LED light can be changed by the light ON/OFF button among Linked to trigger, Always lit, and Always out. When you press the button once, the present status will be shown on the display of the control panel. Then, whenever you press the button, LED light settings will change. Note While the light is lit, if you have operated nothing for about 5 minutes, the light will go out automatically. The light uses just a small current to light up. It has little influence on the tools work capacity. Display LED light settings d1 d2 d3 Linked to trigger Always lit Always out Display

- 27-

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 23 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 23 2023/11/28 14:23:28 2023/11/28 14:23:28 EN 2.1 BASIC OPERATION 2.1.5 CONTROL PANEL FUNCTIONS How to Read the Battery Indication Lamp You can check the remaining battery level. Use the remaining battery level for reference, because it varies somewhat with the ambient temperature, battery properties, etc. Status display Remaining battery level Battery indication lamp Full About 40% or less About 20% or less (Time to charge) Charge the battery pack early. No remaining battery level Charge the battery pack. ( Auto power-off functioning) Blinking Blinking See below for description of the auto power-off function. Auto Power-off Function Status display Blinking This is a function to shut off power to the tool when battery voltage dropped to a certain standard. When it functions, even if you pull the trigger switch, the tool will not move until you charge the battery pack

(or replace it with another battery pack that is charged). Note When auto power-off functions, all the three segments of battery indication lamp will blink. Moreover, the tightening confirmation lamp will also light up in red. When the lamp blinks, charge the battery pack immediately (or replace it with another battery pack that is charged). The battery pack where auto power-off functioned should be charged until charging is completed. If charging is not enough, the auto power-off function may not be canceled.

- 28 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 24 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 24 2023/11/28 14:23:28 2023/11/28 14:23:28 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.1 INSTALLING AND UPDATING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE Before using the tool, install the Tool Manager software in your PC or tablet by following the procedure below. Preparation:

Prepare a PC or tablet with the supported OS installed.

(For the supported OS, Refer to 3.2 .) Installation 1 Download the installer of the Tool Manager software from our website. For how to download the Tool Manager software, Refer to 1.1.1 . 2 Open the folder where you saved the downloaded installer and start Install.exe. 3 When the installer is displayed, select [Next] (). 4 The screen to select an installation folder is displayed. To install the software in the default folder, select [Next] (). To install it in another folder, enter a folder path in Folder () or select [Browse] () and then select a desired installation folder. You can check whether the installation drive has enough capacity by selecting [Disc Cost] ().

(version)

- 29 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 25 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 25 2023/11/28 14:23:28 2023/11/28 14:23:28 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.1 INSTALLING AND UPDATING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 5 When the screen to confirm installation is displayed, select

[Next] (). 6 When the Windows dialog is displayed asking whether to allow the application to make a change to your device, select [Yes]. 7 Installation of the Tool Manager software starts. When the notification that the installation has been successfully completed is displayed, select [Close] (). 8 The installation is completed if you find the Tool Manager icon on the desktop. Update You can update the Tool Manager software by reinstallation with a newer version installer.

(Uninstallation is not required before update.) At the time of installation, confirm the version information shown on the initial screen of the installer.

- 30 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 26 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 26 2023/11/28 14:23:28 2023/11/28 14:23:28 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.2 UNINSTALLING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE You can uninstall the Tool Manager software by performing the standard Windows procedure for uninstalling the application. Uninstalling the Tool Manager software does not clear the data of history log, configured parameters, and option settings, which will be taken over if the Tool Manager software is reinstalled. Select Tool Manager via one of the following Windows menu and execute uninstallation.

(For (1) and (3), right-click to display the uninstallation option.)

(1)

(Start Menu) Note For (1), the uninstallation option will not appear if you have not yet restarted your device since installing the Tool Manager software.

(2) Apps & features

(Windows Settings) Apps Apps & features)

(3) Programs and Features

(Control Panel Programs Programs and Features)

- 31 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 27 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 27 2023/11/28 14:23:28 2023/11/28 14:23:28 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.3 REPAIRING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE You can repair the Tool Manager software via its installer. Try this if the Tool Manager software will not start. 1 On your PC or tablet with the Tool Manager software installed, start the installer of the Tool Manager software as described in 2.2.1. 2 When the screen to repair or remove Tool Manager is displayed, select Repair Tool Manager_EYFSW102 () and click [Finish]

(). 3 Repair of the Tool Manager software starts. When the notification that the repair has been successfully completed is displayed, select [Close] ().

- 32 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 28 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 28 2023/11/28 14:23:29 2023/11/28 14:23:29 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.4 STARTING/EXITING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE You can start and exit the Tool Manager software by following the procedure below. Start the Tool Manager Software To start the Tool Manager software, select Tool Manager on the desktop or from the Windows start menu. Exit the Tool Manager Software To exit the Tool Manager software, select [Exit] in [File] () or select the [x] button () on the upper right of the window.

- 33 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 29 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 29 2023/11/28 14:23:29 2023/11/28 14:23:29 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.5 CONNECTING/DISCONNECTING THE TOOL The tool and your PC or tablet on which the Tool Manager software is installed can be used by connecting them with a USB cable. Preparation: Attach a charged battery pack to the tool. Start the Tool Manager software installed on your PC or tablet. USB Connector There is a USB port on the underside of the housing in the rear of the tool. Open the cover before use. USB connector (Tool side): USB Type-C USB Type-C is a trademark of USB Implementers Forum.

- 34 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 30 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 30 2023/11/28 14:23:29 2023/11/28 14:23:29 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.5 CONNECTING/DISCONNECTING THE TOOL Connect the Tool 1 If power to the tool is not on, pull the trigger switch of the tool to turn on the power. 2 Connect the tool to your PC or tablet with a USB cable. CAUTION Hold the plug and insert or remove it straight. If you insert it diagonally, the connector will be deformed and cause a malfunction. If performing above steps 2 to 1 in this order, you may fail in the connection. 3 When the pairing dialog is displayed, select [Pair Tool]. Depending on the OS, it may be displayed differently. Note If there is no serial number information in the tool, select a tools model number and enter the serial number from the pairing dialog.

(The serial number is printed on the tools color plate.) Depending on the OS, it may be displayed differently. Color plate

- 35 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 31 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 31 2023/11/28 14:23:29 2023/11/28 14:23:29 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.5 CONNECTING/DISCONNECTING THE TOOL 4 If a tools internal clock is different from a clock of your PC or tablet in time by 10 seconds or more, the dialog will ask whether to correct the time of the tools internal clock to that of the clock of your PC or tablet. Select [OK] to make the correction or select [Cancel] to skip this process without correcting the clock. The time of the tools internal clock is reflected in the history log in [Stand Alone Mode]. Depending on the OS, it may be displayed differently. 5 The connected tool is added to the top of the tool list on the Tool Manager software. Once added to the tool list, the tool remains in the list even when it is disconnected.

(If the number of tools on the list exceeds 10, the oldest selected one will be hidden.)

- 36 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 32 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 32 2023/11/28 14:23:29 2023/11/28 14:23:29 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.5 CONNECTING/DISCONNECTING THE TOOL Disconnect the Tool Unplug the USB cable from the tool or the connected PC or tablet. CAUTION If the communication lamp (blue) on the tool is blinking fast (0.2 s cycle), this means that data is being communicated. Do not disconnect the USB cable, otherwise there will be a risk of damaging the data being communicated. Do not work with the USB cable connected with the tool. Before use for work, close the USB connector cover securely by pushing it all the way in.

- 37 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 33 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 33 2023/11/28 14:23:29 2023/11/28 14:23:29 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.6 SCREEN LAYOUT OF THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE Name Menu bar Tool list Overview Opens the menus and windows of file, option, and help. This is a list for selecting a tool to operate. Tool information display The model number and serial number of the selected tool are displayed. Device setting icon Opens the windows of [Tool Settings] and [Tool Info]. Display change tab Changes the history list/history display screen and the parameter list/parameter input screen with each other. History list This is a list for selecting a history log folder to display. Whenever a history log is imported, it will be saved to a newly created folder. History display The list of history logs in the selected history log folder is displayed.

- 38 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 34 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 34 2023/11/28 14:23:30 2023/11/28 14:23:30 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.6 SCREEN LAYOUT OF THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE Name Overview Parameter list Parameter input screen This is a list for selecting a configured parameter file to edit. It can be selected from the data saved in the tool being connected or the Tool Manager software. This is a screen for inputting configured parameters.

- 39 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 35 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 35 2023/11/28 14:23:30 2023/11/28 14:23:30 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.7 MANAGING THE TOOL FROM THE TOOL LIST A tool to operate with the Tool Manager software is selected from the tool list. The tool list displays the tools being connected with the Tool Manager software or the tools that have been connected before. (Up to 9 tools can be displayed.) Data is being communicated while the communication lamp (blue) on the tool is blinking

(0.2 s cycle). Do not disconnect the USB cable. Otherwise, there will be a risk of corrupting the data being communicated. The item of each tool on the tool list displays information on the tool model number, serial number, and connection status. Tool model number Serial number Add to the Tool List Connection status When you pair the tool with the Tool Manager software, it will be displayed automatically on the tool list. Even if the tool is disconnected, it will remain on the tool list as a disconnected tool.

(If the number of tools on the list exceeds 10, the oldest selected one will be hidden.)

- 40 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 36 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 36 2023/11/28 14:23:30 2023/11/28 14:23:30 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.7 MANAGING THE TOOL FROM THE TOOL LIST Hide the Tool The tool in a disconnected state can be hidden from the tool list.

(The data of the hidden tool remains in the Tool Manager software, and it can be recalled with [Open Tool].) 1 Select a disconnected tool on the tool list, and click [Hide]. 2 When the dialog is displayed asking whether to hide the tool, select [Hide], and the selected one will be hidden from the tool list.

- 41 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 37 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 37 2023/11/28 14:23:30 2023/11/28 14:23:30 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.7 MANAGING THE TOOL FROM THE TOOL LIST Recall the Tool The hidden tool can be recalled with [Open Tool]. 1 Click [Open Tool] to display the dialog to open tools. 2 Select a serial number of the tool to display from the [Hidden tools] list (), click [Open] (), and move it to the [Tools to display] list ().

(Up to 9 tools can be set to the displayed tool list.) 3 To hide the tool being displayed, hide it from the [Tools to display] list. Select a serial number of the tool, click [Hide] (), and move it to the [Hidden tools]

list. (The tool being connected cannot be hidden.) 4 When you have selected a tool to display or a tool to hide, click

[Set] () to refresh the tool list.

- 42 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 38 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 38 2023/11/28 14:23:30 2023/11/28 14:23:30 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.7 MANAGING THE TOOL FROM THE TOOL LIST Delete the Tool The tool in a disconnected state can be deleted from the tool list. The history log data of the deleted tool is completely erased from the Tool Manager software. Since the erased history log cannot be restored, you are recommended to back it up.

(For how to make a backup, Refer to 2.2.14 .) 1 Select a disconnected tool on the tool list, and click [Delete]. 2 When the dialog is displayed asking whether to delete the tool, select [Delete], and the selected one will be deleted from the tool list and the history log data will be deleted completely.

- 43 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 39 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 39 2023/11/28 14:23:30 2023/11/28 14:23:30 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL This tool can be used by configuring parameters that specify the operation.

(1) How to Use Parameters Stand Alone Mode The tool runs according to the parameters registered in its internal storage. At configuration At work USB cable Refer to (7) in this section Registering parameters from the Tool Manager software Parameters Running according to the parameters inside the tool

- 44 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 40 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 40 2023/11/28 14:23:30 2023/11/28 14:23:30 EN

2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL Various parameters of the tool can be set from the Tool Manager software.

(2) Select a Parameter File to Edit The parameter file can be selected in one of the following four ways. Selecting the parameter file registered in the tool 1 From the tool list (), select a connected tool for which you edit configured parameters. 2 Select Parameter on the display change tab (), and click [Read From Connected Tool] (). Selecting the parameter file saved in the Tool Manager software

( Refer to (8) in this section for how to save the parameter file.) Select Parameter on the display change tab (), and click a desired parameter file ().

- 45 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 41 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 41 2023/11/28 14:23:31 2023/11/28 14:23:31 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL Selecting the parameter file saved in CSV file format

( Refer to (8) in this section for how to export the parameter file to CSV.) 1 Select Parameter on the display change tab (), and click

[Import Parameter File] (). When Open File Dialog is displayed, select the CSV file that has a parameter file to edit. 2 The selected parameter file is newly added to the parameter list

(), so click that parameter file. Newly creating a parameter file and selecting the file When you select [Create New] in the upper part of the parameter list (), the [Copy Parameter] window opens, where you can enter a parameter registration name and a supplementary comment. They will be registered by clicking [Add] ().

( The registration name and the supplementary comment each can be up to 25 one-byte characters or 15 two-byte characters long.)

( The registration name may not include the letters \, /, :, *, ?, , <, and >. Moreover, the registration name may not begin with a space.) Note Model number of the parameter is automatically set to the number of the selected tool on tool list. Each parameters are in the default values of the selected tool model when the new parameter file is created.

- 46 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 42 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 42 2023/11/28 14:23:31 2023/11/28 14:23:31 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL

(3) Configure Basic Parameters When you select a parameter file, the configured parameter input screen will be displayed. Configure each parameter by entering a numerical value, selecting an option, or selecting ON/OFF. (For information of each parameter item, Refer to 2.2.9 .) Entering a numerical value Selecting an option Selecting ON/OFF For the item with a hover icon (

cursor on the hover icon.

), you can read the explanation for that item by putting a

- 47 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 43 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 43 2023/11/28 14:23:32 2023/11/28 14:23:32 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL

(4) Set Offsets The torque value shown by the tool and the actual torque on the fastener may differ depending on the damping caused by the socket and/or the joint condition. In that case, the torque value shown by the tool can be adjusted by Offset setting. 50.0 Nm 45.0 Nm 50.0 Nm 50.0 Nm Offset For the first application, select [Adjust Torque Offset] () in Offset on the configured parameter input screen to calculate offset values automatically. If the offset values that were previously set for the tool used for work already exist, you can set the same torque performance to the tool by entering those values in [Offset_ Slope] and [Offset_Intercept] () on the configured parameter input screen.

(For details of [Offset_Slope] and [Offset_Intercept], Refer to 2.2.9 .) When selecting [Default] (), you can return the offset values to the models default values. Note To set offsets, you need to empty the history log data in the tools internal storage. Following the dialog displayed after [Adjust Torque Offset] is selected, save and delete the history log data.

(The history log data is saved in the history list.)

- 48 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 44 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 44 2023/11/28 14:23:32 2023/11/28 14:23:32 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL When you select [Adjust Torque Offset] and then, from the dialog displayed after that, save and delete the history log data inside the tool, the offset setting window will open. Perform the following procedure to set offsets. 1 Select a [Socket Extension Length] () to use from the pull-

down menu.

(If the length that matches the socket to use is not found, select the nearest length.) 2 Enter a numerical value that represents [Shut-off Torque] (). 3 Select [Continue Offset] () to register the settings to the tool.

- 49 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 45 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 45 2023/11/28 14:23:32 2023/11/28 14:23:32 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL 4 Remove the tool from the USB cable once, and do a tightening work on the torque tester or the actual bolt. 5 Check the torque result shown by the torque tester or the torque wrench which retightened the actual bolt (Audit Torque Value). Remove the USB cable. 50.0 Nm 50.0 Nm

- 50 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 46 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 46 2023/11/28 14:23:32 2023/11/28 14:23:32 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL Manager software. 6 Reconnect the USB cable to connect the tool to the Tool 7 Select [Acquire] () to import the torque value measured by the tool. The imported value is shown in the [Tool Torque Result] column () in the upper display window. tester or the torque wrench. 8 Enter the [Audit Torque Value] () checked with the torque 9 Select [Check] () to calculate new offset values. 10 Check by % () the difference between the [Tool Torque Result]

() measured by the tool and the [Audit Torque Value] () in the upper display window.

(At this point, the newly calculated offset values have not been registered in the tool yet.) 11 If the above difference is small enough, select [Update & Exit]

() to end the offset setting. If the above difference is still large, select [Continue Offset] () to set the new offset values to the tool and repeat steps 4 to 11 until the difference becomes small enough.

(When % goes into the range of 95.0% to 105.0%, values of %, offset (slope), and offset (intercept) will turn green. Use them for reference.)

- 51 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 47 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 47 2023/11/28 14:23:32 2023/11/28 14:23:32 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL Note After exiting the offset setting window, you can save the updated parameters to parameter list. If you are editing a parameter file read from a connected tool, the parameter file is newly added on parameter list. If you are editing a parameter file originally on parameter list, the parameter file is overwritten. The history log acquired in offset setting is saved to the [Offset] folder on history list. By checking [Minimum Output Mode] on the offset setting window, the tool can be operated in [Minimum Output Mode].

(When you uncheck [Minimum Output Mode], the tool will return to [Offset Mode].) Minimum Output Mode

[Functional overview]

When the target torque is close to the lower limit of the torque control functioning range of the tool, you can check whether torque control is available. The tool in this mode is shut off at the minimum number of pulses (the minimum output). In this case, no history log is recorded. After the work in this mode, use a torque tester or a torque wrench to check whether the torque output by the tool is not more than the target torque. If any over-torque occurs in this mode, the tool might not be available to such work.

- 52 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 48 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 48 2023/11/28 14:23:32 2023/11/28 14:23:32 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL

(5) Set a Snug Point The snug point is used as a reference point to divide angle measurements into the angle before snug and the angle after snug. The snug point can be set from three methods: [When Pulsing Starts], [Snug Torque], and [Select From Graph]. Torque Select From Graph Snug Torque 1 When Pulsing Starts Free Run Pulsing Angle When Pulsing Starts The point in time when the tool started pulsing is regarded as a snug point. It is set just by selecting the item. Snug Torque The point in time when tightening reached the set torque is regarded as a snug point. After selecting the item of [Snug Torque], enter the value of [Detection Threshold]. Select From Graph Select a desired snug point from the torque waveform data. A rise in torque to a 1 increase in tightening angle at the selected point (a slope in graph) is the threshold for determining the snug. Note If there is a steeper slope in graph before the selected point, that point will be judged to be the snug point. Select the item of [Select From Graph], and click [Select Snug Point]. The graph window opens.

- 53 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 49 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 49 2023/11/28 14:23:32 2023/11/28 14:23:32 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL The graph window shows a graph of the most recent history log. The graph used for the setting can be changed from the pull-down above (). By selecting [Acquire] (), you can also import a new graph used for the setting. The setting window has a main window () that displays the entire graph and a sub window () that enlarges and displays any part of the graph. The display range of the main window can be changed by entering the display start and end angles in the [X-axis Range] () under the graph. The display range and scale of the sub window can be changed freely by moving or resizing the selection frame () on the main window. Enlarged The selection frame can be moved or resized by a drag-and-drop operation. The snug point is set by selecting a line between any dots on the graph from the sub window. At the line between the selected dots, the amount of increase in torque with respect to the tightening angle advancing by 1 is the threshold for determining the snug point (Detection Threshold). Select

- 54 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 50 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 50 2023/11/28 14:23:33 2023/11/28 14:23:33 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL By setting the [Detection Start Angle], you can postpone the start of the snug point detection until the set angle is reached. This feature is effective for work where a load is generated on the way before snug. The [Detection Start Angle] is set by moving the selection bar () on the main window to the left or right. When you have finished setting the snug point detection threshold and the snug point detection start angle, select [Set] to exit the graph window.

- 55 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 51 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 51 2023/11/28 14:23:33 2023/11/28 14:23:33 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL

(6) Set a Snug Point Detection Level The snug point detection level setting is used in the following cases. Torque Torque setting Tightening completed

(Stops automatically) i t n o p g u n S l e v e l n o i t c e t e d 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 The load generated halfway due to painting or tapping screws is not detected as a snug point. Load generated halfway Load generated halfway Load generated halfway Load generated halfway When "4" or lower is set, it will be detected as a snug point, resulting in a halfway stop. When "5" or higher is set, it will not be detected as a snug point. When "1" is set, it will be detected as a snug point, resulting in a halfway stop. When "2" or higher is set, it will not be detected as a snug point. Tightening time Can be set in 7 levels 7Set for the work with a high load generated halfway 1Set for the work with a low load generated halfway 0Snug point detection level function OFF

- 56 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 52 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 52 2023/11/28 14:23:33 2023/11/28 14:23:33 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL You can set a snug point detection level from the setting parameter input screen. Enter a desired value in the Snug Point Detection Level input field. CAUTION Set a snug point detection level from 1. Setting a snug point detection level from 27 may result in cracking or deformation of the target material because of high tightening torque. If the tool stops before the snug point at a snug point detection level of 1, set the snug point detection level to 27.

- 57 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 53 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 53 2023/11/28 14:23:33 2023/11/28 14:23:33 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL

(7) Register the Set Parameter File to the Tool When you select [Write to Tool], the set parameter file will be registered to the tool. Note

[Write to Tool] is inactivated and can't be selected when the model number on the parameter file doesn't mach with the tool model number. Before the registration, a dialog lets you check changes from the settings currently registered in the tool. At work in [Stand Alone Mode], the tool runs according to the parameters registered in its inside. The parameter file registered in the tool can be transmitted and registered to the controller by wireless.

(For how to register it to the controller, read the Operating Instructions of the controller.)

- 58 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 54 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 54 2023/11/28 14:23:33 2023/11/28 14:23:33 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL

(8) Manage the Set Parameter File The set parameter file can be registered to the parameter list. Moreover, you can manage it variously on the Tool Manager software. Parameter list Overwriting the parameter file When you select [Save Parameter] () while editing the parameter file on the parameter list (), edits will be overwritten. Additionally saving the parameter file When you select [Copy Parameter] (), the set parameter file will be additionally saved to the parameter list (). You can set a file name and a supplementary comment when additionally saving the parameter file.

(The file name and the supplementary comment each can be up to 25 one-byte characters or 15 two-byte characters long.)

(The file name may not include the letters \, /, :, *, ?, , <, and >. Moreover, the file name may not begin with a space.)

- 59 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 55 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 55 2023/11/28 14:23:33 2023/11/28 14:23:33 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL Adding a comment to the parameter file When you select [Comment] (), a supplementary comment can be set to the specified parameter file.

(The supplementary comment can be up to 25 one-byte characters or 15 two-byte characters long.) Exporting the parameter file When selecting [Export] (), you can export the set parameter file in CSV file format. You can register the output parameter file into the controller.

(For details on how to register it to the controller, read the Operating Instructions of the controller.)

- 60-

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 56 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 56 2023/11/28 14:23:33 2023/11/28 14:23:33 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.8 CONFIGURING PARAMETERS OF THE TOOL Renaming the parameter file 1 Select a parameter file to rename from the parameter list. 2 When selecting [Change Name], you can edit the name of the parameter file.

(The file name and the supplementary comment each can be up to 25 one-byte characters or 15 two-byte characters long.)

(The file name may not include the letters \, /, :, *, ?, , <, and >. Moreover, the file name may not begin with a space.) Deleting the parameter file 1 Select a parameter file to delete from the parameter list (). Or select [...] () on the configured parameter input screen. 2 When you select [Delete], the dialog will ask whether to make a deletion. When you select [OK], the saved parameter file will be deleted.

(When the parameter file of the tool being connected is selected, not [Delete] but

[Factory Default] is displayed on [...].)

- 61 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 57 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 57 2023/11/28 14:23:34 2023/11/28 14:23:34 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.9 PARAMETER LIST Mode Setting

[Functional overview]

Select an operation mode of the tool.

[Default value]

Factory Default Mode (Fd)

[Setting value]

Stand Alone Mode (A):

The history log data is recorded in the internal storage. The tool does not communicate with the controller. Wireless Communication Mode (C): The tool communicates with the controller to send history logs and receive parameters. Shut-Off Torque

[Functional overview]

When the tightening torque reaches the set value of shut-off torque, the tool will stop running automatically. Ensure that it is in the range, Torque Upper Limit Shut-Off Torque Torque Lower Limit.

[Default value]

EYFMH1: 20.0 Nm/177.0 In.lbs/14.7 Ft.lbs EYFMH2: 50.0 Nm/442.5 In.lbs/36.9 Ft.lbs

[Setting value]

EYFMH1: 10.0 Nm to 70.0 Nm/88.5 In.lbs to 619.5 In.lbs/7.4 Ft.lbs to 51.6 Ft.lbs EYFMH2: 30.0 Nm to 140.0 Nm/265.5 In.lbs to 1238.9 In.lbs/22.1 Ft.lbs to 103.2 Ft.lbs Note The range where this tool usage is recommended is as follows:

EYFMH1: 20.0 Nm to 60.0 Nm/177.0 In.lbs to 531.0 In.lbs/14.7 Ft.lbs to 44.2 Ft.lbs EYFMH2: 50.0 Nm to 120.0 Nm/442.5 In.lbs to 1061.9 In.lbs/36.9 Ft.lbs to 88.5 Ft.lbs

( Recommended range for large component assembly:

50.0 Nm to 80.0 Nm/442.5 In.lbs to 708.0 In.lbs/36.9 Ft.lbs to 59.0 Ft.lbs) Torque Upper Limit

[Functional overview]

Set the upper limit of torque for judging work OK or NOK. Ensure that it is in the range, Torque Upper Limit Shut-Off Torque Torque Lower Limit.

[Default value]

*999.9 Nm/*8848.7 In.lbs/*737.4 Ft.lbs

[Setting value]

EYFMH1: 10.0 Nm to *999.9 Nm/88.5 In.lbs to *8848.7 In.lbs/7.4 Ft.lbs to *737.4 Ft.lbs EYFMH2: 30.0 Nm to *999.9 Nm/265.5 In.lbs to *8848.7 In.lbs/22.1 Ft.lbs to *737.4 Ft.lbs Entering the value with (*) will disable the function.

- 62 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 58 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 58 2023/11/28 14:23:34 2023/11/28 14:23:34 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.9 PARAMETER LIST Torque Lower Limit

[Functional overview]

Set the lower limit of torque for judging work OK or NOK. Ensure that it is in the range, Torque Upper Limit Shut-Off Torque Torque Lower Limit.

[Default value]

*0 Nm/*0 In.lbs/*0 Ft.lbs

[Setting value]

EYFMH1: *0 Nm to 70.0 Nm/*0 In.lbs to 619.5 In.lbs/*0 Ft.lbs to 51.6 Ft.lbs EYFMH2: *0 Nm to 140.0 Nm/*0 In.lbs to 1238.9 In.lbs/*0 Ft.lbs to 103.2 Ft.lbs Offset_Slope

[Functional overview]

This is a coefficient that adjusts the slope of the output torque curve of the tool to the torque curve on the simulated actual workpiece. For setting, you are recommended to use the automatic offset calculation function.

(How to set, Refer to 2.2.8 ).

[Default value]

EYFMH1: 25.00 EYFMH2: 55.00

[Setting value]

0.10 to 500.00 Offset_Intercept

[Functional overview]

This is a coefficient that adjusts the intercept of the output torque curve of the tool to the torque curve on the simulated actual workpiece. For setting, you are recommended to use the automatic offset calculation function.

(How to set, Refer to 2.2.8 ). Note The value of offset (intercept) is the lower limit that the torque sensor can measure with accuracy. Ensure that the set value of Shut-Off Torque and/or Torque Lower Limit is not less than the value of offset (intercept).

[Default value]

EYFMH1: 5.00 EYFMH2: 25.00

[Setting value]

-1000.00 to 1000.00 Entering the value with (*) will disable the function.

- 63 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 59 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 59 2023/11/28 14:23:34 2023/11/28 14:23:34 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.9 PARAMETER LIST Angle Before Snug Upper Limit

[Functional overview]

Set the upper limit of accumulated angle, from trigger-on to snug point, for judging work OK or NOK. The snug point detection method can be selected from snug point setting.

[Default value]

*99999

[Setting value]

0 to *99999 Angle Before Snug Lower Limit

[Functional overview]

Set the lower limit of accumulated angle, from trigger-on to snug point, for judging work OK or NOK. The snug point detection method can be selected from snug point setting.

[Default value]

*0

[Setting value]

*0 to 99999 Angle After Snug Upper Limit

[Functional overview]

Set the upper limit of accumulated angle, from snug point to running stop, for judging work OK or NOK. The snug point detection method can be selected from snug point setting.

[Default value]

*9999

[Setting value]

0 to *9999 Angle After Snug Lower Limit

[Functional overview]

Set the lower limit of accumulated angle, from snug point to running stop, for judging work OK or NOK. The snug point detection method can be selected from snug point setting.

[Default value]

*0

[Setting value]

*0 to 9999 Entering the value with (*) will disable the function.

- 64 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 60 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 60 2023/11/28 14:23:34 2023/11/28 14:23:34 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.9 PARAMETER LIST Angle Error Shut-Off

[Functional overview]

With this function ON, if the set upper-limit angle is exceeded during tightening work, the tool will stop operating automatically. To use this function, you need to set the upper-limit angle.

[Default value]

OFF

[Setting value]

ON, OFF No Load Speed

[Functional overview]

Set the anvil rotation speed from trigger-on to tool pulsing start in 100 rpm steps.

[Default value]

2300 rpm

[Setting value]

1500 rpm to 2300 rpm Variable Speed Control

[Functional overview]

When this function is ON, the no-load speed changes according to the trigger pull-in depth. If this function is OFF, the no-load speed will be fixed at the set rpm.

[Default value]

OFF

[Setting value]

ON, OFF Storage Option When Limit Reached

[Functional overview]

This option allows you to select whether to automatically update history logs or prohibit tool operation when the history log storage space in the tool has reached the limit.

[Default value]

Auto Delete

[Setting value]

Auto Delete, Fastening Prohibited Entering the value with (*) will disable the function.

- 65 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 61 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 61 2023/11/28 14:23:34 2023/11/28 14:23:34 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.9 PARAMETER LIST Snug Point

[Functional overview]

Select a detection method for the snug point. The snug point is used as a reference point to divide angle results into the one before snug and the one after snug. When Pulsing Starts:

Snug Torque:

Select From Graph:

[Default value]

When Pulsing Starts The point in time when the tool started pulsing is regarded as a snug point. The point in time when tightening reached the set torque is regarded as a snug point. Select a desired snug point from the torque waveform data.

[Setting value]

When Pulsing Starts, Snug Torque, Select From Graph Detection Threshold (Snug Torque)

[Functional overview]

The point in time when the tightening torque reached this threshold is judged to be the snug point. This parameter is enabled only when the snug point setting is Snug Torque. Note Snug point detection by Snug Torque may be less accurate if the absolute value of Offset_ Intercept is high.

[Default value]

0.0 Nm

[Setting value]

0.0 Nm to 999.9 Nm / 0.0 In.lbs to 8848.7 In.lbs / 0.0 Ft.lbs to 737.4 Ft.lbs Detection Threshold (Select From Graph)

[Functional overview]

The point in time when the tightening torque for a tightening angle of 1 reached not less than this threshold is judged to be the snug point. The value is automatically set by selecting one section on the graph. This parameter is enabled only when the snug point setting is Select From Graph. Note If this threshold is set too high, snug point detection might not be made depending on work.

[Default value]

0.0 Nm/1

[Setting value]

0.0 Nm/1 to 999.9 Nm/1 / 0.0 In.lbs/1 to 8848.7 In.lbs/1 / 0.0 Ft.lbs/1 to 737.4 Ft.lbs/1 Entering the value with (*) will disable the function.

- 66 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 62 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 62 2023/11/28 14:23:34 2023/11/28 14:23:34 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.9 PARAMETER LIST Detection Start Angle (Select From Graph)

[Functional overview]

Unless the accumulated tightening angle reaches this value, snug point detection does not start. This parameter is enabled only when the snug point setting is Select From Graph.

[Default value]

0

[Setting value]

0 to 99999 Snug Point Detection Level

[Functional overview]

This setting changes the load level for bolt snug point detection. Increasing the snug point detection level can prevent the tool from stopping before a bolt reaches the snug point because of a high load during tightening.

(Depending on the work, even if the snug point detection level is increased, the tool might stop before the snug point.)

[Default value]

*0

[Setting value]

*0 to 7 Disable Reverse

[Functional overview]

When this function is ON, the tool will not operate reversely even if the trigger is on.

[Default value]

OFF

[Setting value]

ON, OFF Entering the value with (*) will disable the function.

- 67 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 63 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 63 2023/11/28 14:23:34 2023/11/28 14:23:34 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.9 PARAMETER LIST Rundown Error Detection

[Functional overview]

If the tool shuts off before the set time has passed since work started, this will be judged NOK.

[Default value]

*0.0 s

[Setting value]

*0.0 s to 3.0 s Retightening Prevention

[Functional overview]

Unless the selected time has passed since work was complete, the tool will not operate even if the trigger is on.

[Default value]

*0.0 s

[Setting value]

*0.0 s to 3.0 s Cross Thread Reduction

[Functional overview]

This is a tool operation option for reducing cross threading. OFF:

Soft Start Up Shift Timing: The no-load speed is fixed at the tool lowest rpm before Cross threading reduction function disabled. 360 degree Reverse:

the set time has passed since work started. the tool lowest rpm: about 350 rpm In order to follow a thread, the tool operates 360 degrees reversely before operating forward.

[Default value]

OFF (Soft Start Up Shift Timing *0.0 s)

[Setting value]

OFF, Soft Start Up Shift Timing (*0.0 to 1.0 s), 360 degree Reverse Entering the value with (*) will disable the function.

- 68 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 64 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 64 2023/11/28 14:23:34 2023/11/28 14:23:34 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.9 PARAMETER LIST Ignore Rundown Result Before Snug

[Functional overview]

When this function is ON, if work is interrupted by trigger-off before the snug point, the history log for that will not be recorded. From the Snug Point parameter, set the method for determining the snug point.

[Default value]

OFF

[Setting value]

ON, OFF Snug Torque Detection Delay

[Functional overview]

The tool will not shut off even if a load is generated on the way that exceeds the set shut-off torque before the set time has passed since work started.

[Default value]

*0.0 s

[Setting value]

*0.0 s to 3.0 s Buzzer

[Functional overview]

This is a condition option for sounding a buzzer when work is complete. OFF:

Buzzer OK:

Buzzer NOK: After work is complete, a buzzer is set off when the result is NOK. A buzzer is not set off after work is complete. After work is complete, a buzzer is set off when the result is OK.

[Default value]

OFF

[Setting value]

OFF, Buzzer OK, Buzzer NOK Entering the value with (*) will disable the function.

- 69 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 65 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 65 2023/11/28 14:23:34 2023/11/28 14:23:34 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.9 PARAMETER LIST Schematic diagram of parameters related to torque, angle, and speed. Ignore load and dont shut-off Snug Torque Detection Delay Torque Upper Limit Shut-Off Torque Torque Lower Limit Torque curve Snug Torque Switch ON Angle Before Snug Angle After Snug Angle Before Snug Lower Limit Angle Before Snug Upper Limit Angle After Snug Lower Limit Angle After Snug Upper Limit No Load Speed (1500 to 2300 rpm) Variable Speed Control (ON, OFF) Soft Start (ON the tool lowest rpm, OFF) the tool lowest rpm: about 350 rpm

- 70-

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 66 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 66 2023/11/28 14:23:34 2023/11/28 14:23:34 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.10 SETTING OPTIONS FOR THE TOOL You can set the following tool options from the Tool Manager software. Tool Information (Serial) Maintenance Interval Alarm (Pulse Time) Clock 1 Open the tool info window. Select the tool () being connected on the tool list or the device setting icon (), and click [Tool Info]. 2 Set the Tool Information. You can set the Tool Information (serial number) from the tool info window. 1. Enter an eight-digit serial number in the serial number input field ().

(The serial number is printed on the tools color plate.) 2. When you select [Set Serial Number] (), the newly set tool information will be registered to the tool. Color plate Note By checking [Change] in the item of [Model], you will be ready to change the tool model number information registered in the tool being connected. This function is used only when a wrong model number is registered to the tool because of the replacement of circuit components or other reasons. CAUTION The tool may not deliver its true performance, if you register any model number different from that on the rating label of the tool.

- 71 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 67 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 67 2023/11/28 14:23:34 2023/11/28 14:23:34 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.10 SETTING OPTIONS FOR THE TOOL 3 Set the Maintenance Interval Alarm (Pulse Time). The Maintenance Interval Alarm (Pulse Time) can be set from the tool info window. Maintenance Interval Alarm (Pulse Time)

[Functional overview]

This is an alarm that counts the pulsing time that has been accumulated since the tool started to be used, and reminds you of maintenance timing. When you have 1 hour or less to go before the set time, the control panel display will give you a warning. If the set time is reached, the control panel display will remind you of that, and the tools motor will be locked (stopped). Initializing the tool will reset the accumulated pulsing time, and also unlock the tools motor. CAUTION When the tool is initialized, the other parameters will also return to the factory defaults. If you initialize the tool, be sure to reconfigure parameters before using it again. Warning display (changing every 0.5 seconds):

Setting value (1 to 99) -1 Operation mode (A or C) Stop display (changing every 0.5 seconds):

Setting value (1 to 99) 0

[Default value]

*0 hours

[Setting value]

*0 hours to 99 hours Entering the value with (*) will disable the function. 1. 2. Enter time it takes to sound an alarm, in the input field () of [Maintenance Interval Alarm (Pulse Time)]. When you select [Set Interval Alarm] (), the alarm will be set to the tool.

- 72 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 68 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 68 2023/11/28 14:23:35 2023/11/28 14:23:35 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.10 SETTING OPTIONS FOR THE TOOL 4 Set the Clock. The tools internal clock can be set from the tool info window. When you click [Adjust to PC Clock] (), the tools internal clock will be synchronized to your PCs clock.

- 73 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 69 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 69 2023/11/28 14:23:35 2023/11/28 14:23:35 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.11 INITIALIZING CONFIGURATION OF THE TOOL You can initialize the tool from the Tool Manager software. For the initialized tool, all the configured parameters return to factory default settings. Moreover, the count of accumulated pulsing time of the Maintenance Interval Alarm (Pulse Time) is reset to 0. 1 From the tool list (), select a tool to initialize. The tool to be initialized needs to be being connected with the Tool Manager software. 2 Select [Read From Connected Tool] () from the parameter list. 3 Select [...] () from the configured parameter input screen, and click [Factory Default]. When a parameter file other than that of the tool being connected is selected, not

[Factory Default] but [Delete] is displayed. 4 When the dialog is displayed asking whether to initialize the tool, select [OK], and it will be initialized.

- 74 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 70 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 70 2023/11/28 14:23:35 2023/11/28 14:23:35 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.12 DISPLAYING AND SAVING THE HISTORY LOG You can save the history logs recorded in the tool to the Tool Manager software, and browse them later. Save the History Logs Recorded in the Tool to the Tool Manager software It is possible to read a history log from the tool connected with the Tool Manager software via USB communication, and save it to the history list. 1 From the tool list (), select a tool being connected. 2 Select a history log on the display change tab (), and click

[Read From Connected Tool] (). 3 It will be read when you select [Acquire] from the dialog to be displayed. The read history log is saved automatically to the Tool Manager software. 4 From the dialog displayed after reading is complete, you can choose whether to delete the read history log from the tools internal memory or keep having it. 5 The read history log is added to the history list (). Note You can set a parameter to select whether to overwrite old history logs or prohibit fastening when the capacity of history logs saved in the tool has reached the upper limit of the tools storage. Read out the data periodically.

- 75 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 71 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 71 2023/11/28 14:23:35 2023/11/28 14:23:35 EN

2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.12 DISPLAYING AND SAVING THE HISTORY LOG Browse the History Logs Saved in the Tool Manager software The history logs saved in the Tool Manager software are displayed on the history list (). When you select a desired history log, the contents of that will be displayed on the history display screen () in the right. To browse the history log acquired in offset setting, select [Offset] () from the history list.

(For how to set offsets, Refer to 2.2.8 .) For the items of [Work Result], [Torque Result], [Angle (Before Snug)], and [Angle (After Snug)], the display will be highlighted in green when there is no problem, or in red if there is any problem. Make a Supplementary Comment on the History Log File You can make a supplementary comment on the history log file by performing the following procedure. 1 Select a desired history log file (), and click [Comment] (). 2 When the comment field () becomes active, enter a desired comment and press the Enter key. The supplementary comment can be up to 25 one-byte characters or 15 two-byte characters long.

- 76 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 72 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 72 2023/11/28 14:23:35 2023/11/28 14:23:35 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.12 DISPLAYING AND SAVING THE HISTORY LOG Export History Log Files From the menu displayed by hovering the mouse cursor over [Export], you can select one of the following formats and export history logs. CSV format: The file format for browsing and editing ZDT format: The file format for making the Tool Manager software installed in the other device import history log data Import the History Log (in ZDT format) Exported from the Other Device The Tool Manager software can import the history log exported in the ZDT format. 1 Select [Import History File] () from the history list. 2 Select a ZDT file hat has a history log file to browse, from the Open File Dialog to be displayed. 3 The history log file in the ZDT file is newly added to the history list (). When you select a file, the contents of that will be displayed on the display window

() in the right.

- 77 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 73 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 73 2023/11/28 14:23:36 2023/11/28 14:23:36 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.12 DISPLAYING AND SAVING THE HISTORY LOG Browse the Graph Data Saved in the Tool Manager software The graph data of a conducted job is saved in the tool. After the job, you can view the data from Tool Manager software. Note The Tool Manager software calculates a torque waveform from the voltage information of the torque sensor, independently of the shut-off algorithm of the tool. Therefore, torque values may be displayed differently from those for shut-off judgment of the tool. Use them as reference information that shows how the measured torque tends to change.

m N

e u q r o T Time [s]

- 78 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 74 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 74 2023/11/28 14:23:36 2023/11/28 14:23:36 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.12 DISPLAYING AND SAVING THE HISTORY LOG Double-clicking the row of a history log displayed on the history display screen will open the history detail window and display the graph data of that history log. Double-clicking The graph to display can be changed by using the [<] [>] buttons and pull-down menu

() above the window. Change history log folders of the selected tool by using [<] and

[>], and select a history log to display the graph for from the pull-down menu. By selecting pull-down menus () under the graph, you can set tightening torque, tightening angle, or speed as a vertical axis of the graph, and set tightening work time, tightening angle, or number of pulses as a horizontal axis. By selecting a pull-down menu () under the graph, you can change the scale of the graph. The data window () in the right displays the log data for each sample (every 20 ms in no-load fastening, and every one pulse in pulsing) in one tightening job. You can expand the window by dragging the end of the history detail window.

- 79 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 75 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 75 2023/11/28 14:23:37 2023/11/28 14:23:37 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.12 DISPLAYING AND SAVING THE HISTORY LOG Make a Tool Setting While Browsing the Graph Data When you select [Tool Settings] () above the window, the setting window will open. Some parameters can be configured from the setting window.

(For how to configure each parameter, Refer to 2.2.8 .) To configure parameters that are not displayed on the setting window, click [Parameters]

() to move to the Parameter tab. When you click [Write to Tool] (), the set parameter file will be registered to the tool selected on the tool list ().

(The parameters that were not configured in this setting window will remain in their original state, without being changed.)

- 80 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 76 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 76 2023/11/28 14:23:37 2023/11/28 14:23:37 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.12 DISPLAYING AND SAVING THE HISTORY LOG Export the Graph Data When you press [Export], the selected graph data will be exported in CSV file format.

- 81 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 77 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 77 2023/11/28 14:23:37 2023/11/28 14:23:37 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.13 HISTORY LOG ITEM LIST Count

[Display overview]

A number counts up in the order that work was done. The count will be reset when you import history logs from the tool to the Tool Manager software and delete the history logs from the memory of the tool. Date

[Display overview]

This shows the date when work was done. Time

[Display overview]

This shows the time when work was done. Work Result

[Display overview]

The result of work is judged OK or NOK. The OK/NOK judgment criteria are as follows. OK: A shut-off stop made successfully without any error, NOK: A shut-off stop incomplete, or made with an error NOK Message

[Display overview]

When the work result is NOK, the reason for NOK is displayed in the Torque, Angle, or Error category. If the reason for NOK is classified as Error, the details will be displayed in the error message on the last line of the history log. Shut-off Torque

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of torque that makes the tool shut off. Upper Torque Limit

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the upper limit of torque for judging the work result OK. Lower Torque Limit

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the lower limit of torque for judging the work result OK.

- 82 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 78 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 78 2023/11/28 14:23:37 2023/11/28 14:23:37 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.13 HISTORY LOG ITEM LIST Torque Result

[Display overview]

This shows the result value of torque that the tool output at the work concerned. Upper Angle Limit (Before Snug)

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the upper limit of angle before snug for judging the work result OK. The angle before snug is an anvil turning angle from trigger-on to the snug point set by the snug point parameter. Lower Angle Limit (Before Snug)

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the lower limit of angle before snug for judging the work result OK. The angle before snug is an anvil turning angle from trigger-on to the snug point set by the snug point parameter. Angle (Before Snug)

[Display overview]

This shows the result value of the angle before snug of the work concerned. The angle before snug is an anvil turning angle from trigger-on to the snug point set by the snug point parameter. Upper Angle Limit (After Snug)

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the upper limit of angle after snug for judging the work result OK. The angle after snug is an anvil turning angle from the snug point set by the snug point parameter to the end of work. Lower Angle Limit (After Snug)

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the lower limit of angle after snug for judging the work result OK. The angle after snug is an anvil turning angle from the snug point set by the snug point parameter to the end of work.

- 83 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 79 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 79 2023/11/28 14:23:37 2023/11/28 14:23:37 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.13 HISTORY LOG ITEM LIST Angle (After Snug)

[Display overview]

This shows the result value of the angle after snug of the work concerned. The angle after snug is an anvil turning angle from the snug point set by the snug point parameter to the end of work. Number of Pulse

[Display overview]

This shows the number of pulses that the tool emitted at the work concerned. Fastening Time

[Display overview]

This shows the time it took from trigger-on to the end of work at the work concerned. Battery Level

[Display overview]

This shows the remaining battery level when the work concerned started in the four levels: 3 to 0. The remaining battery level that each display shows is as follows. 3: Fully charged to adequate remaining battery level, 2: 40% or less, 1: 20% or less, 0: Dead battery. Offset Slope

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the coefficient for converting the output voltage of the torque sensor into torque. Offset Intercept

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the coefficient for converting the output voltage of the torque sensor into torque. Snug Point Detection Method

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the [Snug Point Detection Method]. Snug Point Detection Threshold

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the threshold for determining the snug point. The [Snug Point Detection Threshold] is displayed when the configured parameter of the [Snug Point] is [Snug Torque] or [Select From Graph].

- 84 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 80 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 80 2023/11/28 14:23:37 2023/11/28 14:23:37 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.13 HISTORY LOG ITEM LIST Snug Point Detection Start Angle

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the angle for starting the snug point detection. The [Snug Point Detection Start Angle] is displayed when the configured parameter of the [Snug Point] is [Select From Graph]. Angle Error Shut-Off

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the function for stopping the tool when the upper-limit angle is exceeded. No Load Speed

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the speed at no load. Disable Reverse

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the function for disabling reverse work. Rundown Error Detection

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the function for judging work where the tool shut off within the set time after trigger-on to be NOK. Retightening Prevention

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the function for disabling operation of the tool until the set time has passed since trigger-on. Cross Thread Reduction

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the operation option for reducing cross threading. Soft Start Up Shift Timing

[Display overview]

When the cross threading reduction function is set for Soft start, the set time is displayed.

- 85 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 81 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 81 2023/11/28 14:23:37 2023/11/28 14:23:37 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.13 HISTORY LOG ITEM LIST Snug Torque Detection Delay

[Display overview]

This shows the configured parameter of the function for the tool ignoring the work load in the middle of tightening before the set time has passed since trigger-on. Error Message

[Display overview]

When the reason for NOK, the work result displayed on the NOK message, is classified as Error, details of the error are displayed.

(For details of error messages, Refer to 4.3.1 .)

- 86 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 82 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 82 2023/11/28 14:23:37 2023/11/28 14:23:37 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.14 MANAGING THE DATA FOLDER You can manage data folders from [File] on the Tool Manager software. A management of data folders is made by selecting a desired folder from the folder selection dialog. Folder selection dialog Setting Data Folder You can specify the folder to which to save the data of history logs and configured parameters. Select a destination folder, from the folder selection dialog. When you select a folder, new folders will be created under the name of [History] and [Parameter] in the selected folder. Data Backup You can make a backup of history logs and configured parameters. Select a folder to which to save the backup, from the folder selection dialog. When you select a folder, a new backup folder, whose name shows the creation date and time, will be created in the selected folder.

(Example: Folder name 20230415103045 = Created at 10:30:45 on April 15, 2023) CAUTION Do not change the name of the backup folder. If the folder name is changed, the backup data cannot be restored. Data Restore The data of history logs and configured parameters saved as a backup can be imported to the Tool Manager software and restored. Select a backup folder from which to restore the backup, from the folder selection dialog. The data in the backup folder will be imported to the Tool Manager software. Note The same data as the data that is already on the Tool Manager software will not be overwritten.

- 87 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 83 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 83 2023/11/28 14:23:37 2023/11/28 14:23:37 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.15 SETTING THE DISPLAY OF THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE Various display settings of software can be made from [Option] of the Tool Manager software. Select [Option] to open the option dialog. Basic Settings You can select Language, Unit, Default Tab, and CSV separator. For languages, English or Japanese can be selected. For a unit of torque, Nm, In.lbs, or Ft.lbs can be selected. For default tab, [Parameter] or [History] can be selected. You can choose [Comma] or [Semicolon] for the separator in CSV file format to be input and output in the parameter file and the history log file. History You can show or hide each of the items of history logs. Items with (

The history log data of hidden items will not be deleted. When you [Acquire] history logs from the tool, the data of hidden items will also be saved

) in their checkboxes are displayed on the Tool Manager software. to the specified folder. Parameter You can show or hide each of the items of configured parameters. Items with (

When you [Apply] configured parameters to the tool, the default values or previously set

) in their checkboxes are displayed on the Tool Manager software. values of even the hidden items will be registered to the tool.

- 88 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 84 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 84 2023/11/28 14:23:37 2023/11/28 14:23:37 EN 2.2 USING THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE 2.2.16 HELP FUNCTION You can refer to various pieces of help information from [Help] of the Tool Manager software. Compatible Tools You can check the model number of the tool that can be operated from the Tool Manager software. Software Version You can check the version information of the software in use.

- 89 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 85 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 85 2023/11/28 14:23:38 2023/11/28 14:23:38 EN 3.1 CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATIONS OF THE TOOL Capacity of the Tool Model No. EYFMH1WC EYFMH1WP EYFMH2WC EYFMH2WP Recommended work

(Bolt strength) M8 (high-strength bolt) M10 (ordinary bolt) Torque control functioning range About 20.0 Nm to 60.0 Nm

/ 177.0 In.lbs to 531.0 In.lbs

/ 14.7 Ft.lbs to 44.2 Ft.lbs M10 (high-strength bolt) M12 (ordinary to high-strength bolt) M14 (ordinary bolt) About 50.0 Nm to 120.0 Nm

/ 442.5 In.lbs to 1061.9 In.lbs

/ 36.9 Ft.lbs to 88.5 Ft.lbs

< Recommended range for large component assembly>

50.0 Nm to 80.0 Nm

/442.5 In.lbs to 708.0 In.lbs

/36.9 Ft.lbs to 59.0 Ft.lbs Workload and work speed

(with a fully charged pack)

<M8: 23 Nm / 204 In.lbs / 17 Ft.lbs>

940 bolts: About 0.5 s/bolt (EYFB43) 490 bolts: About 0.5 s/bolt (EYFB41)

<M10: 43 Nm / 381 In.lbs / 32 Ft.lbs>

670 bolts: About 0.7 s/bolt (EYFB43) 350 bolts: About 0.7 s/bolt (EYFB41)

<M12: 71 Nm / 628 In.lbs / 52 Ft.lbs>

450 bolts: About 0.9 s/bolt (EYFB43) 230 bolts: About 0.9 s/bolt (EYFB41)

- 90 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 86 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 86 2023/11/28 14:23:38 2023/11/28 14:23:38 EN 3.1 CAPACITY AND SPECIFICATIONS OF THE TOOL Specifications of the Tool Model No. Wrench size Motor voltage No-load speed EYFMH1WC EYFMH1WP EYFMH2WC EYFMH2WP 12.7 mm 14.4 V DC 0 to about 2300 rotations/minute

(The maximum speed can be set from about 1500 to 2300 rotations/minute.) Number of pulses 0 to about 2700 rotations/minute 0 to about 2600 rotations/minute Overall length About 215 mm Dimensions Overall height EYFB41 used: About 246 mm EYFB43 used: About 264 mm Overall width About 61 mm

(Maximum battery pack width: About 75 mm) Mass (Weight) EYFB41 used: About 1.8 kg EYFB43 used: About 2.05 kg Wireless Communication Standard Wireless LAN (IEEE802.11a/b/g/n) n: HT20 only Frequency band 2.412-2.462 GHz / 5.180-5.240 GHz Number of channels 2.4 GHz: 1 to 11 channels / 5 GHz: 36, 40, 44, 48 channels USB connector specifications Number of tool history logs that can be saved (in [Stand Alone Mode]) Number of tool parameters that can be held (in [Stand Alone Mode]) Charging time (when EY0L82B battery charger used) 1 USB Type-C About 45000 bolts (at 1.2 s work) 1 parameter EYFB41; Charging for practical use: 35 minutes, Full charging: 40 minutes EYFB43; Charging for practical use: 45 minutes, Full charging: 60 minutes 1 USB Type-C is a trademark of USB Implementers Forum.

- 91 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 87 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 87 2023/11/28 14:23:38 2023/11/28 14:23:38 EN 3.2 SPECIFICATIONS OF THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE Tool Manager (Model No.: EYFSW102) Compatible OS Windows10 Home, Windows10 Pro, Windows10 Enterprise

(32 bits/64 bits) English version, Japanese version Supported language English, Japanese Recommended hard disk capacity 10 MB or more (Log data excluded) Communication interface USB 2.0 or higher The minimum OS operation specifications required should be satisfied. CAUTION Some PCs are not available even if they meet the operating environment. Depending on the use environment etc. of your PC, the descriptions and screens in this Operating Instructions might be different from the actual descriptions and screens. Please be forewarned. The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without prior notice. Any reproduction of the contents of this Operating Instructions in whole or in part is prohibited without permission. Descriptions on how to operate Windows in this Operating Instructions use the procedures and screens of Windows 10. Tool Manager is only available in the Compatible OS. Operation is not guaranteed for all the PCs meeting the recommended environment. Windows 3.1, Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows NT, and Windows 2000 are not supported. Operation is not guaranteed for Windows XP Media Center Edition, Tablet PC Edition, Windows Vista Enterprise, and Windows 7 Enterprise. Operation is not guaranteed for 64-bit operating systems of Windows XP and Windows Vista. Operation is not guaranteed in XP mode of Windows 7. Operation is not guaranteed for operating systems in the upgraded environment. The multi-boot environment is not supported. The multi-monitor environment is not supported. Only the user with system administrator privileges (Administrator) is allowed to conduct installation and uninstallation. Before use, log onto it as the user name with an administrator account or a standard user account. The user name with a Guest account cannot use it. Operation is not guaranteed in the environment where you have changed the language by using the multilingual user interface (MUI) function of Windows Vista or Windows 7 Ultimate. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. IBM and PC/AT are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Apple, Apple logos, Macintosh, and MacOS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. Intel, Pentium, and Celeron are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. The screenshots are used in accordance with the guidelines of Microsoft Corporation. Other names, company names, and product names mentioned herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

- 92 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 88 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 88 2023/11/28 14:23:38 2023/11/28 14:23:38 EN 3.2 SPECIFICATIONS OF THE TOOL MANAGER SOFTWARE About Handling (Be sure to Read)

<Limitations>

The Tool Manager software is for configuring various settings of EYFMH1/EYFMH2. CAUTION Note the following points when using this software. Using it is construed as an agreement on the [Use conditions] in the right.

[Use conditions]

We give this software no warranty of any kind. We assume no responsibility for direct damage, indirect damage, far-

reaching damage, consequential damage, or special damage of any kind resulting from the use or operation of this software. We forbid you from reproducing or distributing this software.

- 93 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 89 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 89 2023/11/28 14:23:38 2023/11/28 14:23:38 EN 3.3 PAIRING WITH THE CONTROLLER Enabling Pairing Use the Pairing key on the controller unit (EYFRW2). Select the communication lamp of the number with no registration (lamp off) and hold the Pairing key down to enter the pairing mode. During 2 minutes of the pairing mode, start the pairing mode on a tool within the coverage to automatically establish pairing. If pairing is not established within the time, the pairing mode will end. After you attempt to start pairing, it may take some time until the controller enters the pairing mode. Communication lamp Pairing key To register Tool No. 4 1 Press the Pairing key on the controller 4 times to select Tool No. 4. Communication lamp No. 4 blinks. No registration

(off) Selected (blinking) 2 While No. 4 is selected, hold down the Pairing key on the controller to enter the pairing mode of Tool No. 4. In the pairing mode, Communication lamp No. 4 starts blinking rapidly. Selected

(blinking) Pairing mode

(rapid blinking)

- 94 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 90 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 90 2023/11/28 14:23:38 2023/11/28 14:23:38 EN 3.3 PAIRING WITH THE CONTROLLER 3 Set the battery pack in the tool and while holding down the LED light ON/OFF button, pull the Trigger switch. The tool enters the pairing mode. Trigger switch LED light ON/OFF button When the tool enters pairing mode, Display on Control Panel indicates the pairing mode. Display Wireless communication is automatically established and pairing registration is completed. When pairing registration is completed, Communication lamp No. 4 on the controller stays lit. If pairing fails, cancel pairing on the controller and then try again. Pairing mode

(rapid blinking) Registered

(on) Note You can enable pairing by setting in the setting screen in addition to using the key on the unit. For how to enable pairing in the setting screen and details on operation of the controller, see the Operating Instructions supplied with the controller.

- 95 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 91 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 91 2023/11/28 14:23:38 2023/11/28 14:23:38 EN 3.3 PAIRING WITH THE CONTROLLER Cancelling Pairing Use the Pairing key on the controller unit (EYFRW2). Select the communication lamp of the tool number you want to cancel registration (lamp on) and hold the pairing key down to cancel pairing registration. Communication lamp Pairing key To cancel Tool No. 4 1 Press the Pairing key on the controller 4 times to select Tool No. 4. Communication lamp No. 4 blinks. Registered

(on) Selected

(blinking) 2 While No. 4 is selected, hold down the Pairing key on the controller to cancel pairing registration of Tool No. 4. When pairing is cancelled, Communication lamp No. 4 stops blinking and turns off. Selected

(blinking) No registration

(off) Note You can cancel pairing by setting in the setting screen in addition to using the key on the unit. For how to cancel pairing in the setting screen and details on operation of the controller, see the Operating Instructions supplied with the controller.

- 96 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 92 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 92 2023/11/28 14:23:38 2023/11/28 14:23:38 EN 3.4 PRECAUTIONS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION Cautions for using a WLAN device The device uses a frequency band shared with other types of equipment including industrial, scientific, and medical devices (e.g., a microwave) and radio stations such as a premises radio station (licenced) and low-power radio station (unlicenced) for mobile identification used in factory manufacturing lines and an amateur radio station

(licenced). 1. Before using the device, confirm that there is no premises or low-power radio station for mobile identification or no amateur radio station operating in the vicinity. 2. 3. If the device causes harmful interference with a premises radio station for mobile identification, stop use of the band immediately and consult the support centre below for the solution of the interference problem (e.g., installing a partition). If the device causes harmful interference with a premises or low-power radio station for mobile identification or an amateur radio station or such other problems, consult the support centre. There may be noise, shorter radio coverage, or malfunction occurring in the following environmental conditions. There is an obstruction (e.g., a metal or reinforced concrete object) that prevents smooth radio propagation between the wireless-enabled tool unit and the controller. The antennas of the controller are covered with metal. An operators body is interfering with radio propagation between an operator (the wireless-enabled tool unit) and the controller. There is a microwave, PC, or any other device causing noise in the vicinity. A cell-phone or PHS phone is used near the wireless-enabled tool unit and the controller. FCC Caution: To assume continued compliance, install and use in accordance with provided instructions. Use only the battery pack specified in the instructions. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. FCC ID: ACJ-EYFMH IC: ACJ-EYFMH The enclosed device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (i.) this device may not cause harmful interference and

(ii.) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

- 97 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 93 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 93 2023/11/28 14:23:38 2023/11/28 14:23:38 EN 4.1 CLEANING AND STORAGE How to Clean Wiping with Soft Cloth Do not use wet cloth, thinner, alcohol, benzine, or other volatile liquids.

(Cause of discoloration, deformation, or crack) For Long Life Request maintenance from the dealer or our consultation service periodically. Removing Foreign Bodies from the Battery Pack Seat on the Battery Charger Pull the power plug out of the outlet. Lithium-ion battery pack seat Hold down the cover to expose the connectors in sections and .

: Remove foreign bodies with a brush or the like, being careful not to strain the connectors.

: Remove foreign bodies with cloth or the like. How to Store Avoid the following conditions during storage. Car cabin or other hot places Places exposed to direct sunlight Places exposed to water or dampness Places with a lot of foreign bodies or dust Places within reach of children Places with gasoline or other flammables

- 98 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 94 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 94 2023/11/28 14:23:38 2023/11/28 14:23:38 EN 4.2 BATTERY PACK DANGER Use them for our charging tools and our authorized charging tools only. Do not use other rechargeable battery packs than those for our charging tools only. Do not use any modified battery pack (including any battery pack with its internal parts replaced after disassembly), either. Do not put any battery pack into a fire or heat it. Otherwise, it may generate heat, ignite, or burst. After removing a battery pack from the tool or the battery charger, be sure to attach the pack cover to it. Failure to attach it may cause the battery connectors to short-circuit and ignite. For Long Life After using a lithium-ion battery pack, store it without charging. When it is not in use, attach a pack cover to prevent dust and a short circuit. Remove foreign objects if these are on the connectors. Life of Battery Pack The product has come to the end of its life when it delivers only half or so of its performance compared with the initial one even if it is fully charged. Purchase a battery pack for our charging tools only. We assume no responsibility for accidents or failures of any kind resulting from the use of other battery packs than those that we specify. WARNING Do not use any recycled battery pack with only its internal storage battery replaced. Otherwise, it may cause an accident or a failure. About Recycling Attention A Li-ion battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery. In Not Using a Battery Pack for the Time Being Before storing Store without charging Before reusing Fully charge

- 99 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 95 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 95 2023/11/28 14:23:38 2023/11/28 14:23:38 EN 4.2 BATTERY PACK

- 100 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 96 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 96 2023/11/28 14:23:39 2023/11/28 14:23:39 EN 4.3 ERROR CODES 4.3.1 ERROR CODES ON CONTROL PANEL If the tool or the battery pack is abnormal, an error code blinks on the control panel. Before requesting repair, take the following action. Send it for repair if there is no improvement even after the following action. Display Possible cause Abnormality in the tools internal memory or the communication line, wireless communication, etc. The battery pack is hot. The motor of the tool is hot. Abnormality in the connectors between the tool and the battery pack Action Remove and attach the battery pack once, and then restart the tool. If the problem persists, perform the initialization.

(With E1 displayed, press and hold the LED button for about 10 seconds.) In Wireless Communication Mode, also check the condition of the controller. Interrupt work, and replace the battery pack, or wait for the battery pack temperature to fall before use. Interrupt work, and wait for the motor temperature to fall before use. Check whether there is any foreign body or wear in the connectors. Or replace the battery pack. Overload, failure in the motor, etc. Check whether the job suits the capacity of the tool. Error in USB communication with the Tool Manager software Break in the USB cable, external noise Check the USB cable for connection. Replace the USB cable. Change the workplace. Abnormality, failure, etc. in the tools circuit Error in wireless communication with the controller The operation range limitation function is active (only when using EYFRW2) Abnormality, failure, etc. in the torque sensor Excessive work time (Excessive measurement data) Judged NOK The button battery inside the tool has run out. Excessive batch workload in [Wireless Communication Mode]

(Excess of the capacity of memory temporarily storing communication data) Restart the tool and the controller. Check for communication, with another normal tool. If the error persists, contact the manufacturer of the controller. Remove and then set the battery pack within the wireless coverage before using again. If the problem persists after you remove and then set the battery pack, check the controller and the peripheral devices.

: Pull the trigger switch and restart the tool.

: Work again in [Stand Alone Mode], and check the error description from the history log. Reconsider the configured parameters. Reconsider the workload in a batch. Select a setting other than [After Batch Complete] for Set

[Graph Sending/Storing Timing]. CAUTION Overload protection (E5) may function if you tighten or loosen the bolt that has been tightened up.

- 101 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 97 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 97 2023/11/28 14:23:39 2023/11/28 14:23:39 EN 4.3 ERROR CODES 4.3.2 ERROR MESSAGES OF HISTORY LOGS If tightening work is not complete successfully, you can check the error description from the history log displayed on the Tool Manager software. (For how to browse history logs, Refer to 2.2.12 .) Category Error message Cause Action

(for unintended cause) 1 Torque Torque exceeded 2 Torque Torque insufficient The measured torque of the tool exceeded the upper-limit torque setting. Check the settings. Reconsider the member conditions. The member conditions do not Disable the upper-limit torque suit the tool. setting. The measured torque of the tool at the time of work stop is less than the lower-limit torque. The member conditions do not Check the settings. Reconsider the member conditions. Disable the lower-limit torque suit the tool. setting. 3 Angle Before snug angle exceeded The angle before snug in the middle of work exceeded the upper-limit setting. 4 Angle Before snug angle insufficient The angle before snug at the time of work stop is less than the lower-limit setting. 5 Angle After snug angle exceeded The angle after snug in the middle of work exceeded the upper-limit setting. 6 Angle After snug angle insufficient The angle after snug at the time of work stop is less than the lower-limit setting. 7 Error Rundown error A shut-off stop was made within the rundown error time setting. Check the settings (including the snug point setting). Reconsider the member conditions. Disable the upper-limit setting. Check the settings (including the snug point setting). Reconsider the member conditions. Disable the lower-limit setting. Check the settings (including the snug point setting). Reconsider the member conditions. Disable the upper-limit setting. Check the settings (including the snug point setting). Reconsider the member conditions. Disable the lower-limit setting. Check the settings (shut-off torque and rundown error time setting). Reconsider the member conditions. (The stop might be caused by an abnormal load.) Disable the rundown error setting.

- 102 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 98 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 98 2023/11/28 14:23:39 2023/11/28 14:23:39 EN 4.3 ERROR CODES 4.3.2 ERROR MESSAGES OF HISTORY LOGS Category Error message Cause 8 Error Stop before shut off 9 Error Shut off incomplete 10 Error Overcurrent 11 Error Low voltage Work ended before shut-off. The user turned off the trigger. The stop was made by another error. Work ended by both stop before shut-off and occurrence of pulsing. Stop before shut-off Work was started. Protection stopped because abnormal current was observed in the tool. Dependence on the work environment Dependence on the battery or the tool Protection stopped because abnormal voltage was observed around the battery. Dependence on the work environment Dependence on the battery or the tool 12 Error Motor high temperature Protection stopped because the motor of the tool is hot. 13 Error Battery high temperature Protection stopped because the battery pack became hot. 14 Error Battery sensor error Abnormality was observed around the battery pack connectors to the tool. Action

(for unintended cause)

<If a manual stop was made>

Reconsider the work environment. Check the member conditions.

<If another error appears>

Check the error description and take action. Refer to the section of a stop before shut-off. Reconsider the work procedure. Reconsider the work environment (whether there is an abnormal load, and how workers use the tool). Reconsider the battery pack

(charging or replacing with a new one). Clean the connectors (check for dust and wear in the connectors). Wait for it to cool down before use (no condensation).

< If there are continuous abnormal loads>

Reconsider the work environment. Check the member conditions. Wait for it to cool down before use.

< If there are continuous abnormal loads>

Reconsider the work environment. Check the member conditions. Reattach the battery pack. Reconsider the battery pack

(charging or replacing with a new one). Clean the connectors (check for dust and wear in the connectors).

- 103 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 99 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 99 2023/11/28 14:23:39 2023/11/28 14:23:39 EN 4.3 ERROR CODES 4.3.2 ERROR MESSAGES OF HISTORY LOGS Category Error message Cause 15 Error Motor sensor error 16 Error Torque sensor error 17 Error Torque sensor protection 18 Error Tool locked The motors temperature sensor detected a low temperature error. Criterion: -30 C or below A break or a short circuit was detected around the torque sensor. In a single job, one of the following items has exceeded the measurable upper limit. Number of pulses

(= 511 times) Work time (= 13 seconds) Accumulated angle

(= 131071) After the trigger was turned on, the motor failed to run. Hardware failure, abnormal load, etc. 19 Error Circuit identification error The circuit identification switch of the tool has an unacceptable setting. 20 Error Parameter error Parameters set in the tool are out of the setting range. Action

(for unintended cause) Reconsider the work environment. There is a failure if it occurs frequently, because judgment is based on the temperature only. Check for frequency. Request repair if it occurs frequently. Reconsider the work environment (including the job and the procedure). Check the member conditions. Reconsider the work environment. Check for frequency. Request repair if it occurs frequently. Check for frequency. Request repair if it occurs frequently. (Circuit failure, or mistake in manufacture or repair) Check the parameter settings. Set the parameters again to the tool. Reconsider the work 21 Error Data limit exceeded The recordable data amount per job was reached. environment (including the job and the procedure). 22 Error Maintenance warning The accumulated pulsing time has 1 hour to go before the reminder setting. 23 Error Maintenance protection The accumulated pulsing time exceeded the reminder time setting. Check the member conditions. Check the setting. Make the setting again (such as extending, initializing, or disabling the setting). Check the setting. Make the setting again (such as extending, initializing, or disabling the setting).

- 104 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 100 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 100 2023/11/28 14:23:39 2023/11/28 14:23:39 EN 4.4 LICENCE TERMS Software Licence Terms This product consists of following types of software.

(1) Software developed independently by Panasonic Corporation (Panasonic)

(2) Software that a third party holds and is licenced to Panasonic

(3) Open-source software The software in the category (3) above is distributed in anticipation of being useful on a standalone basis; however, we make no warranty of any kind, including not making an implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for particular purpose. See below for copyright holders information and details on licences. Copyright holders information Copyright (c) 2009-2019 Arm Limited. Copyright (c) 2018-2019 Arm Limited. Copyright (c) 2009-2018 Arm Limited. Copyright (c) 2017-2019 IAR Systems Copyright (c) 2017-2019 Arm Limited. Copyright (c) 2018 Arm Limited. Copyright (c) 2017-2019 Arm Limited. Copyright (c) 2017-2018 Arm Limited. Copyright (c) 2013-2019 ARM Limited. Copyright (c) 2013-2020 Arm Limited. Copyright (C) 2006-2018, Arm Limited (or its affiliates) Copyright (C) 2006-2015, ARM Limited Copyright (C) 2006-2018, ARM Limited Copyright (C) 2015-2018, Arm Limited (or its affiliates) Copyright (C) 2016, ARM Limited Copyright (C) 2006-2016, ARM Limited Copyright (C) 2016-2018, ARM Limited Copyright (C) 2018, Arm Limited (or its affiliates) Copyright (C) 2018, Arm Limited Copyright (C) 2006-2017, ARM Limited Copyright (c) 2019 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics International N.V. Copyright (c) 2013-2017 ARM Limited. Copyright (C) 2017 Texas Instruments Incorporated Copyright (c) 2017-2018, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2017, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2017-2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2018, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2015-2018, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2015-2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2012-2018 Texas Instruments Incorporated

- 105 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 101 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 101 2023/11/28 14:23:39 2023/11/28 14:23:39 EN 4.4 LICENCE TERMS Copyright (c) 2012-2019 Texas Instruments Incorporated Copyright (c) 2016-2018 Texas Instruments Incorporated Copyright (c) 2014-2018, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (C) 2016-2018, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (C) 2016-2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (C) 2016-2020, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2017-2020, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2013-2018, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2021 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2019 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. COPYRIGHT(c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2018 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2020 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. Copyright (C) 2017 Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates. Copyright (C) 2019 StMicroelectronics, Inc. Copyright (C) 2020 Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates. Licences Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004 http://www.apache.org/licenses/

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION 1. Definitions. License shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. Licensor shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License. Legal Entity shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, control means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity. You (or Your) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.

- 106 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 102 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 102 2023/11/28 14:23:39 2023/11/28 14:23:39 EN 4.4 LICENCE TERMS Source form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files. Object form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types. Work shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work

(an example is provided in the Appendix below). Derivative Works shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof. Contribution shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, submitted means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as Not a Contribution. Contributor shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work. 2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form. 3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable

- 107 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 103 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 103 2023/11/28 14:23:39 2023/11/28 14:23:39 EN 4.4 LICENCE TERMS

(except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed. 4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:

(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and

(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and

(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and

(d) If the Work includes a NOTICE text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License. You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or

- 108 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 104 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 104 2023/11/28 14:23:39 2023/11/28 14:23:39 EN 4.4 LICENCE TERMS for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License. 5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions. 6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file. 7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an AS IS BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License. 8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages. 9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

- 109 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 105 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 105 2023/11/28 14:23:39 2023/11/28 14:23:39 EN 4.4 LICENCE TERMS END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work. To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets {}

replaced with your own identifying information. (Dont include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same printed page as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party archives. Copyright {yyyy} {name of copyright owner}

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the License);

you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.

Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004 http://www.apache.org/licenses/

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION 1. Definitions. License shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. Licensor shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License. Legal Entity shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, control means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

- 110 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 106 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 106 2023/11/28 14:23:39 2023/11/28 14:23:39 EN 4.4 LICENCE TERMS You (or Your) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License. Source form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files. Object form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types. Work shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work

(an example is provided in the Appendix below). Derivative Works shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof. Contribution shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, submitted means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as Not a Contribution. Contributor shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work. 2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

- 111 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 107 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 107 2023/11/28 14:23:39 2023/11/28 14:23:39 EN 4.4 LICENCE TERMS 3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable

(except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed. 4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:

(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and

(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and

(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and

(d) If the Work includes a NOTICE text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.

- 112 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 108 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 108 2023/11/28 14:23:39 2023/11/28 14:23:39 EN 4.4 LICENCE TERMS You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License. 5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions. 6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file. 7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an AS IS BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License. 8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages. 9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability

- 113 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 109 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 109 2023/11/28 14:23:39 2023/11/28 14:23:39 EN 4.4 LICENCE TERMS incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work. To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets []

replaced with your own identifying information. (Dont include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same printed page as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party archives. Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the License);

you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.

# Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics This software component is licensed by STMicroelectronics under the **BSD 3-Clause** license. You may not use this file except in compliance with this license. You may obtain a copy of the license [here]

(https://opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause). Copyright <YEAR> <COPYRIGHT HOLDER>

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list

- 114 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 110 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 110 2023/11/28 14:23:40 2023/11/28 14:23:40 EN 4.4 LICENCE TERMS of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Copyright (c) 2017, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of Texas Instruments Incorporated nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;

OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

- 115 -

Continued to the next page EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 111 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 111 2023/11/28 14:23:40 2023/11/28 14:23:40 EN 4.4 LICENCE TERMS

The FreeRTOS kernel is released under the MIT open source license, the text of which is provided below. This license covers the FreeRTOS kernel source files, which are located in the

/FreeRTOS/Source directory of the official FreeRTOS kernel download. It also covers most of the source files in the demo application projects, which are located in the /FreeRTOS/Demo directory of the official FreeRTOS download. The demo projects may also include third party software that is not part of FreeRTOS and is licensed separately to FreeRTOS. Examples of third party software includes header files provided by chip or tools vendors, linker scripts, peripheral drivers, etc. All the software in subdirectories of the /FreeRTOS directory is either open source or distributed with permission, and is free for use. For the avoidance of doubt, refer to the comments at the top of each source file. License text:

Copyright (C) 2019 Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the Software), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

- 116 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 112 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 112 2023/11/28 14:23:40 2023/11/28 14:23:40 EN Table des matires 1. AVANT UTILISATION 1.1 MISE EN ROUTE ...................................................................................................................225 1.1.1 OBTENTION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER .......................................................225 1.1.2 POUR OBTENIR LES INSTRUCTIONS DUTILISATION ........................................226 1.2 CONSIGNES DE SCURIT ................................................................................................227 1.2.1 CONSIGNES DE SCURIT SUPPLMENTAIRES ................................................227 1.2.2 UTILISATION PRVUE .............................................................................................229 1.3 DESCRIPTION DES FONCTIONS ........................................................................................230 1.4 OPTIONS AVEC FRAIS SUPPLMENTAIRES ....................................................................232 1.5 SCHMA DE CBLAGE .......................................................................................................233 1.6 CHARGEMENT EN COURS .................................................................................................234 1.7 CONFIGURATIONS DOUTIL AVANT UTILISATION ...........................................................238 2. FONCTIONNEMENT 2.1 FONCTIONNEMENT DE BASE ............................................................................................239 2.1.1 MODE DE FONCTIONNEMENT DE LOUTIL...........................................................239 2.1.2 FONCTION DE CONTRLE DE COUPLE ...............................................................240 2.1.3 MODE DUTILISATION..............................................................................................241 2.1.4 TMOIN DE CONFIRMATION DE SERRAGE ET TMOIN DE COMMUNICATION ......243 2.1.5 FONCTIONS DU PANNEAU DE COMMANDE .........................................................245 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER ..................................................................247 2.2.1 INSTALLATION ET MISE JOUR DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER .....................247 2.2.2 DSINSTALLATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER ...........................................249 2.2.3 RPARATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER .....................................................250 2.2.4 DMARRER/QUITTER LE LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER ........................................251 2.2.5 CONNEXION/DCONNEXION DE LOUTIL .............................................................252 2.2.6 PRSENTATION DE LCRAN DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER ..........................256 2.2.7 GESTION DE LOUTIL PARTIR DE LA LISTE DOUTILS ....................................258 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL ..............................................262 2.2.9 LISTE DES PARAMTRES .......................................................................................280 2.2.10 OPTIONS DE RGLAGE DE LOUTIL ...................................................................289 2.2.11 INITIALISATION DE LA CONFIGURATION DE LOUTIL .......................................292 2.2.12 AFFICHAGE ET ENREGISTREMENT DU JOURNAL DE LHISTORIQUE ...........293 2.2.13 LISTE DES LMENTS DU JOURNAL DE LHISTORIQUE .................................300 2.2.14 GESTION DU DOSSIER DE DONNES .................................................................305 2.2.15 CONFIGURATION DE LAFFICHAGE DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER .............306 2.2.16 FONCTION DAIDE .................................................................................................307 3. CARACTRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES 3.1 CAPACIT ET CARACTRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES DE LOUTIL ....................................308 3.2 SPCIFICATIONS DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER ...........................................................310 3.3 APPARIEMENT AVEC LE CONTRLEUR ...........................................................................312 3.4 PRCAUTIONS POUR LA COMMUNICATION SANS FIL ..................................................315 4. MAINTENANCE ET DPANNAGE 4.1 NETTOYAGE ET STOCKAGE ..............................................................................................316 4.2 BATTERIE AUTONOME ........................................................................................................317 4.3 CODES DERREUR ...............................................................................................................319 4.3.1 CODES DERREUR SUR LE PANNEAU DE COMMANDE .....................................319 4.3.2 MESSAGES DERREUR DES JOURNAUX DHISTORIQUE...................................320 4.4 CONDITIONS DE LICENCE ..................................................................................................323 Les caractres en rouge montrent ceux qui ne sont pas mentionns dans une version abrge (imprime) des Instructions de Instructions dutilisation.

- 117 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 224 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 224 2023/11/28 14:23:55 2023/11/28 14:23:55 FR 1.1 MISE EN ROUTE 1.1.1 OBTENTION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER Pour utiliser ce produit, il est ncessaire de configurer ses paramtres laide du logiciel ddi (Tool Manager). Vous devez tout dabord obtenir le logiciel Tool Manager en suivant la procdure ci-aprs. Prparation:

Prparez un PC ou une tablette avec le systme dexploitation support install. Systmes dexploitation supports:

Windows10 Home, Windows10 Pro, Windows10 Enterprise Accdez au site de tlchargement suivant et tlchargez le programme dinstallation du logiciel Tool Manager.

(Pour savoir comment installer le logiciel Tool Manager, Se reporter 2.2.1 ) Le site de tlchargement du logiciel Tool Manager. https://www.panasonic-powertools.eu/fr/construction/documents.htm Veuillez utiliser la version la plus rcente.

- 118 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 225 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 225 2023/11/28 14:23:55 2023/11/28 14:23:55 FR 1.1 MISE EN ROUTE 1.1.2 POUR OBTENIR LES INSTRUCTIONS DUTILISATION Accdez au site de tlchargement suivant et tlchargez les Instructions dutilisation de EYFMH1WC ou EYFMH2WC. Pour obtenir la version intgrale des Instructions dutilisation, veuillez consulter le site Web. https://www.panasonic-powertools.eu/fr/construction/documents.htm

- 119 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 226 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 226 2023/11/28 14:23:55 2023/11/28 14:23:55 FR 1.2 CONSIGNES DE SCURIT 1.2.1 AVERTISSEMENTS GNRAUX DE SCURIT CONCERNANT LOUTIL MCANIQUE AVERTISSEMENT Lisez tous les avertissements de scurit, les instructions, les illustrations et les spcifications fournis avec cet outil mcanique. Ne pas suivre lensemble des instructions ci-dessous peut provoquer une lectrocution, un incendie et/ou des blessures graves. Le terme outil mcanique utilis dans tous les avertissements se rfre aux outils mcaniques fonctionnant sur le secteur (avec un cordon dalimentation) et aux outils mcaniques fonctionnant sur batterie (sans fil). Conservez tous les avertissements et les instructions pour rfrence ultrieure. 1) Scurit de la zone de travail a) Gardez la zone de travail propre et bien are. Les endroits encombrs et sombres invitent les accidents. b) Ne faites pas fonctionner les outils mcaniques dans des atmosphres explosives, comme en prsence de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de poussire. Les outils mcaniques gnrent des tincelles qui peuvent enflammer la poussire ou les vapeurs. c) Gardez les enfants et les spectateurs loigns lors du fonctionnement dun outil mcanique. Les distractions peuvent en faire perdre le contrle. 2) Scurit lectrique a) La fiche des outils mcaniques doit correspondre aux prises secteur. Ne modifiez la fiche sous aucun prtexte. Nutilisez pas de fiche adaptatrice avec les outils mcaniques mis la terre. Des fiches non modifies et des prises secteur correspondant rduisent les risques dlectrocution. b) vitez tout contact physique avec les surfaces mises la terre telles que tuyaux, radiateurs, micro-ondes et rfrigrateurs. Il y a un risque dlectrocution supplmentaire si votre corps est mis la terre. c) Nexposez pas les outils mcaniques la pluie ou des conditions humides. De leau pntrant dans un outil mcanique augmente le risque dlectrocution. d) Ne malmenez pas le cordon. Nutilisez jamais le cordon pour transporter, pour tirer ou pour dbrancher loutil mcanique. Gardez le cordon loign de la chaleur, de lhuile, dobjets aux bords coupants ou de pices en mouvement. Les cordons endommags on emmls augmentent le risque dlectrocution.

- 120 -

EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 108 EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 108 2023/09/21 15:04:12 2023/09/21 15:04:12 FR 1.2 CONSIGNES DE SCURIT 1.2.1 AVERTISSEMENTS GNRAUX DE SCURIT CONCERNANT LOUTIL MCANIQUE e) Lors du fonctionnement des outils mca niques lextrieur, utilisez une rallonge adapte lutilisation lextrieur. Lutilisation dun cordon adapt lutilisation lextrieur rduit les risques dlectrocution. f) Si le fonctionnement dun outil mcanique dans un endroit humide est invitable, utilisez une alimentation lectrique pour dispositif protg contre le courant rsiduel (RCD). Lutilisation dun RCD rduit les risques dlectrocution. 3) Scurit personnelle a) Restez alerte, regardez ce que vous faites et faites preuve de bon sens lorsque vous utilisez un outil mcanique. Nutilisez pas un outil mcanique alors que vous tes fatigu ou sous les effets de drogue, dalcool ou de mdicaments. Un moment dinattention pendant le fonctionnement de loutil mcanique peut entraner des blessures graves. b) Utilisez des quipements de protection personnelle. Portez toujours des protections pour vos yeux. Des quipements de protection comme un masque antipoussire, des chaussures de scurit non glissantes, un casque de protection ou des protection pour les oreilles utiliss dans les conditions appropries rduisent les risques de blessures. c) vitez tout dmarrages accidentel. Assurez-vous que linterrupteur est en position darrt avant de brancher loutil la source dalimentation et/ou au bloc de batterie ou pour saisir loutil ou pour le transporter. Transporter les outils mcaniques avec le doigt sur linterrupteur ou le branchement doutils mcaniques dont linterrupteur est sur la position de marche invitent les accidents. d) Retirez toute cl dajustement ou cl de serrage avant de mettre loutil mcanique en marche. Une cl de serrage ou une cl dajustement laisse attache une pice tournante de loutil mcanique peut entraner des blessures corporelles. e) Ne vous mettez pas en dsquilibre. Gardez une bonne prise au sol et votre quilibre tout moment. Ceci permet un meilleur contrle de loutil mcanique dans des situations inattendues. f) Habillez-vous correctement. Ne portez pas de vtements lches ni de bijoux. Gardez vos cheveux, vos vtements et vos gants loigns des pices en mouvement. Des vtements lches, des bijoux ou des cheveux longs peuvent se faire prendre dans les pices en mouvement. g) Si des appareils sont fournis pour la connexion dinstallations dextraction et de collecte de la poussire, veillez les connecter et les utiliser correctement. Lutilisation dun collecteur de poussire peut rduire les risques lis la poussire.

- 121 -

EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 109 EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 109 2023/09/21 15:04:12 2023/09/21 15:04:12 FR 1.2 CONSIGNES DE SCURIT 1.2.1 AVERTISSEMENTS GNRAUX DE SCURIT CONCERNANT LOUTIL MCANIQUE h) Ne laissez pas lhabitude acquise grce lutilisation frquente des outils vous faire devenir trop sr de vous et vous faire oublier les principes de scurit des outils. Une action imprudente peut provoquer des blessures graves en une fraction de seconde. 4) Utilisation et soins de loutil mcanique a) Ne forcez pas loutil mcanique. Utilisez loutil mcanique correct pour votre application. Loutil mcanique correct excute mieux le travail dans de meilleurs conditions de scurit sil est utilis lallure pour laquelle il a t conu. b) Nutilisez pas loutil mcanique si linter rupteur ne le met pas en marche ou ne larrte pas. Tout outil mcanique qui ne peut pas tre contrl par son interrupteur est dangereux et doit tre rpar. c) Dbranchez la fiche de la source dalimentation et/ou retirez la batterie autonome, si elle est amovible, de loutil mcanique avant deffectuer tout ajustement, de changer daccessoire ou de ranger des outils mcaniques. De telles mesures de scurit prventives rduisent les risques de faire dmarrer loutil mcanique accidentellement. d) Rangez les outils mcaniques inutiliss hors de la porte des enfants et ne laissez personne qui nest pas familiaris avec loutil mcanique ou ses instructions faire fonctionner loutil mcanique. Les outils mcaniques sont dangereux dans les mains des utilisateurs manquant dentranement. e) Entretenez bien les outils mcaniques et les accessoires. Vrifiez lalignement ou lembotage des pices en mouvement, lintgrit des pices et toute autre condition pouvant affecter le fonctionnement de loutil mcanique. Sil est endommag, faites rparer loutil mcanique avant de lutiliser. De nombreux accidents sont provoqus par des outils mcaniques mal entretenus. f) Maintenez les outils de coupe affts et propres. Les outils de coupe bien entretenus avec des lames bien afftes ont moins de chances de gripper et sont plus faciles contrler. g) Utilisez loutil mcanique, les accessoires, les mches etc., conformment ces instructions, en tenant compte des conditions de travail et de la tche excuter. Lutilisation de loutil mcanique des fins autres que celles pour lesquelles il a t conu peut prsenter une situation risque. h) Maintenez les poignes et les surfaces de prhension sches, propres et exemptes dhuile et de graisse. Des poignes et des surfaces de prhension glissantes ne permettent pas une manipulation et un contrle de loutil en toute scurit dans des situations inattendues.

- 122 -

EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 110 EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 110 2023/09/21 15:04:12 2023/09/21 15:04:12 FR 1.2 CONSIGNES DE SCURIT 1.2.1 AVERTISSEMENTS GNRAUX DE SCURIT CONCERNANT LOUTIL MCANIQUE 5) Utilisation et soins de la batterie de loutil a) Neffectuez la recharge quavec le chargeur spcifi par le fabricant. Un chargeur convenant un bloc de batterie peut entraner un risque dincendie lorsquun autre bloc de batterie est utilis. b) Nutilisez les outils mcaniques quavec les bloc de batterie spcialement conus pour eux. Lutilisation de tout autre bloc de batterie peut entraner un risque de blessure et dincendie. c) Lorsquun bloc de batterie nest pas utilis, gardez-le loign dobjets mtalliques comme agrafes, pices de monnaie, cls, clous, vis ou tout autre petit objet mtallique pouvant tablir une connexion entre les deux bornes. Si les bornes de la batterie sont mis en court-circuit, cela peut entraner des brlures ou un incendie. d) Si elle est malmene, du liquide peut schapper de la batterie. vitez tout contact. Si un contact accidentel se produit, rincez leau. Si du liquide entre en contact avec les yeux, consultez un mdecin. Le liquide ject de la batterie peut entraner des irritations ou des brlures. e) Nutilisez pas de batterie autonome ni doutil endommag ou modifi. Des batteries endommages ou modifies peuvent se comporter de manire imprvisible et provoquer un incendie, une explosion ou un risque de blessure. f) Nexposez pas une batterie autonome ou un outil au feu ou une temprature excessive. Lexposition au feu ou une temprature suprieure 130 C (266 F) peut provoquer une explosion. g) Suivez toutes les instructions relatives la charge et ne chargez pas la batterie autonome ou loutil en dehors de la plage de temprature spcifie dans les instructions. Une charge incorrecte ou des tempratures en dehors de la plage spcifie peut endommager la batterie et augmenter le risque dincendie. 6) Rparation a) Faites rparer votre outil mcanique par du personnel de rparation qualifi en nutilisant que des pices de rechange identiques. Ceci assure le maintien de la scurit de loutil mcanique. b) Ne rparez jamais les batteries autonomes endommages. Lentretien des batteries autonomes ne doit tre effectu que par le fabricant ou des prestataires de service agrs. Avertissements de scurit pour les tournevis et les cls chocs Tenez loutil lectrique par les surfaces de prhension isoles lorsque vous effectuez une opration dans laquelle la fixation peut entrer en contact avec un cblage cach. Les fixations qui entrent en contact avec un fil sous tension peuvent nergiser les parties mtalliques exposes de loutil lectrique et pourraient transmettre un choc lectrique loprateur.

- 123 -

EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 111 EYFMH1_H2_WEB.indb 111 2023/09/21 15:04:12 2023/09/21 15:04:12 FR 1.2 CONSIGNES DE SCURIT 1.2.1 CONSIGNES DE SCURIT SUPPLMENTAIRES 1) Porter des protges-oreilles lors de lutilisation de loutil pendant des priodes prolonges. Une exposition prolonge un bruit de haute intensit peut entraner une perte auditive. 2) Noubliez pas que cet appareil est toujours prt fonctionner, parce quil ne doit pas tre branch dans une prise lectrique. 3) Ne touchez pas les pices rotatives pour viter toute blessure. 4) Nutilisez pas loutil continuellement pendant une longue priode. Arrtez dutiliser loutil de temps en temps pour viter une augmentation de la temprature et de surchauffer le moteur. 5) Ne laissez pas tomber loutil. 6) Assurez-vous de recouvrir entirement le connecteur USB avec le cache avant de dmarrer le travail. Symbole Signification V Volts Courant continu n0 Vitesse sans charge

...min-1 Tours ou mouvements alternatifs par minute Ah Capacit lectrique de la batterie autonome Pour rduire les risques de blessure, lutilisateur doit lire et comprendre les instructions dutilisation. Nincinrez pas ni ne chauffer le bloc de batterie. Ne pas utiliser ni charger en condition de temprature leve. Ne pas exposer des tempratures leves. Ne pas dmonter ni modifier. Ne pas exposer la pluie ni leau.

- 124 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 227 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 227 2023/11/28 14:23:56 2023/11/28 14:23:56 FR 1.2 CONSIGNES DE SCURIT 1.2.1 CONSIGNES DE SCURIT SUPPLMENTAIRES AVERTISSEMENT Nutilisez que la batterie autonome Panasonic conue pour lutilisation avec cet outil rechargeable. Panasonic dcline toute responsabilit en cas de dommage ou daccident caus par lutilisation dune batterie autonome recycle ou de contrefaon. Ne mettez pas la batterie autonome au rebut dans un feu ou ne lexposez pas une chaleur excessive. Ne laissez pas dobjets mtalliques entrer en contact avec les bornes de la batterie autonome. Ne transportez pas ou ne rangez pas la batterie autonome dans un rcipient contenant des clous ou tout autre objet mtallique. Ne chargez pas la batterie autonome dans un endroit o la temprature est leve comme proximit dun feu ou la lumire directe du soleil. Sinon la batterie peut surchauffer, prendre feu ou exploser. Aprs avoir retir la batterie autonome de loutil ou du chargeur, remettez toujours le couvercle de la batterie autonome en place. Sinon, les contacts de la batterie peuvent se mettre en court-circuit, entranant le risque dun incendie. Si la batterie autonome sest dtriore, la remplacer par une batterie neuve. Lutilisation prolonge dune batterie autonome endommage peut provoquer des dgagements de chaleur, un dpart de feu ou lexplosion de la batterie. Pour viter tout risque de fuite, surchauffe, gnration de fume, incendie et explosion, suivez ces instructions lorsque vous manipulez nos outils rechargeables

(corps principal de loutil/batterie autonome/chargeur).

- Ne laissez pas les coupes de matriaux ou la poussire se dposer sur la batterie autonome.

- Avant de ranger loutil, liminez les coupes de matriaux et la poussire ventuellement prsentes sur la batterie autonome, placez le cache des bornes en plastique rouge, puis rangez la batterie dans le coffret de loutil en lloignant des objets mtalliques (vis, clous, etc.). Toute dtrioration provoque par des objets pars dans le coffret ne sera pas couverte par cette garantie. Ne manipulez pas les outils rechargeables comme indiqu ci-dessous.

( Il existe un risque de production de fume, dincendie et dexplosion)

- En les utilisant ou en les rangeant dans des lieux exposs la pluie ou lhumidit

- En les utilisant plongs dans leau

- 125 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 228 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 228 2023/11/28 14:23:56 2023/11/28 14:23:56 FR 1.2 CONSIGNES DE SCURIT 1.2.2 UTILISATION PRVUE Cet outil est une cl impulsion mcanique sans fil et peut tre utilis pour serrer des boulons, des crous et des vis. En outre, il offre une fonction de contrle de couple qui arrte automatiquement le fonctionnement de loutil lorsquune charge prdfinie est atteinte pour obtenir un couple de serrage homogne. UTILISATION INCORRECTE Lutilisation de loutil autre que pour LUSAGE PRVU est dangereuse et doit tre vite. Loutil ne doit pas tre utilis aux fins suivantes ;

mlanger des matriaux de peinture ou de construction, polissage, meulage, afftage, gravure. RISQUES RSIDUELS Certains risques rsiduels demeurent mme si loutil est utilis de manire correcte, savoir ;

contact avec la pointe rotative contact avec les bords tranchants dun matriau ou autre.

- 126 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 229 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 229 2023/11/28 14:23:56 2023/11/28 14:23:56 FR

1.3 DESCRIPTION DES FONCTIONS Outil Entranement carr (bague de retenue et goupille) Bague de retenue Entranement carr (type goupille de dtente) Goupille de dtente

(EYFMH1WC / EYFMH2WC)

(EYFMH1WP / EYFMH2WP) Bloc de capteur Remarque Le code QR sur la partie infrieure du bloc de capteur est notre marque de didentification de fabrique. Tmoin de confirmation de serrage Se reporter 2.1.4 Tmoin de communication Se reporter 2.1.4 Orifice de ventilation Lumire DEL Se reporter 2.1.5 Interrupteur gchette Se reporter 2.1.3 Levier dinversion marche avant/marche arrire Se reporter 2.1.3 Orifice de montage du support doutil Cache du connecteur USB Panneau de commande Se reporter la page suivante Marques dalignement Connecteur USB

(USB Type-C) Se reporter 2.2.5 USB Type-C est une marque dpose de USB Implementers Forum.

- 127 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 230 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 230 2023/11/28 14:23:56 2023/11/28 14:23:56 FR 1.3 DESCRIPTION DES FONCTIONS Panneau de commande Se reporter 2.1.5 Affichage Tmoin indicateur de la batterie Bouton Marche/Arrt de la lumire DEL Accessoires Cble USB 1 m EYFMH1XL701W

- 128 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 231 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 231 2023/11/28 14:23:56 2023/11/28 14:23:56 FR 1.4 OPTIONS AVEC FRAIS SUPPLMENTAIRES Liste des options avec frais supplmentaires EYFB41 EYFB43 Batterie Li-ion 14,4 V DC (3,6 V/4 piles) 14,4 V DC (3,6 V/8 piles) EY0L82 Voir la plaque signaltique se trouvant sur le ct infrieur du chargeur. 0,93 kg EYFB41 Utilisable: 35 min. Plein: 40 min. EYFB43 Utilisable: 45 min. Plein: 60 min. Batterie autonome Modle Stockage de la batterie Tension de la batterie Chargeur de batterie Modle Puissance nominale Poids Dure de chargement Cble USB 1 m EYFMH1XL701W (1) Protection doutil EYFA14-A (bleu), D (orange), G (vert), H (gris), Y (jaune) Protection de batterie EYFA04-H (gris) Pour EYFB43 EYFA06-H (gris) Pour EYFB41 Suspension doutil EYFA40 Bague de retenue (bague C) EZ7552K0187 (1) Contrleur EYFRW2 1 Vous pouvez acheter cet article comme pice de rechange. MISE EN GARDE La suspension doutil sert dquilibreur seulement. Si loutil est soumis une force ou un choc violent, loutil peut tomber et se casser. Remarque Veuillez acheter la batterie autonome, EYFB41 ou EYFB43. Veuillez acheter la bague de retenue (bague C), EZ7552K0187 (EYFMH1WC, EYFMH2WC).

- 129 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 232 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 232 2023/11/28 14:23:56 2023/11/28 14:23:56 FR 1.5 SCHMA DE CBLAGE Loutil peut tre utilis en tant connect des dispositifs externes comme illustr dans le schma de raccordement ci-dessous. Logiciel de programmation Tool Manager (Modle n : EYFSW102)

[Systme dexploitation compatible]

Windows10 Home/Windows10 Pro/Windows10 Enterprise

[Caractristiques]

Voir les rsultats de travail, grer les fichiers de rsultat de travail Configurer les paramtres, grer les fichiers de paramtres Comment accder aux instructions :

Se reporter 1.1.1 Exemple de connexion PC de configuration Communication sans fil Communication filaire, connexion directe Vers la borne USB (Type-A) Cble USB (accessoire) Vers la borne USB (Type-C) Cet appareil Contrleur

(EYFRW2) Pour plus de dtails sur le contrleur, voir les instructions dutilisation fournies avec celui-ci. USB Type-C est une marque dpose de USB Implementers Forum.

- 130 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 233 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 233 2023/11/28 14:23:57 2023/11/28 14:23:57 FR 1.6 CHARGEMENT EN COURS Avant le chargement Vous pouvez charger une batterie autonome au lithium-ion coulissante.

(Chargement de EYFB41 ou EYFB43) Installez un chargeur de batterie dans un endroit o la temprature est comprise entre 5 C et 40 C et chargez la batterie autonome dont la temprature est proche de celle de lemplacement de charge. Si la temprature de la batterie autonome est de 5 C ou moins ou diffre considrablement de la temprature du lieu de charge, il se peut que la charge soit insuffisante. Laissez la batterie dans ce lieu pendant 1 heure ou plus avant la charge. Attention Si vous avez charg deux batteries autonomes daffile, arrtez la charge pendant environ 30 minutes. Attendez que la temprature du chargeur de batterie baisse avant de charger. Si vous nentendez pas le ventilateur fonctionner juste aprs linsertion dune batterie autonome, il se peut que le chargeur de batterie soit dfectueux. Faites rparer immdiatement. Remarque Le chargeur de batterie contrle son ventilateur de refroidissement en fonction de la temprature de la batterie autonome et du mode de charge. Le fonctionnement du ventilateur change durant la charge, mais cela ne reprsente pas un dysfonctionnement. Mme aprs avoir dbranch la prise de courant, le tmoin dalimentation peut rester allum pendant environ 10 secondes, mais ceci ne reprsente pas un dysfonctionnement. Les tempratures indiques dans les instructions dutilisation sont donnes titre de rfrence. En fait, elles peuvent varier sensiblement selon les conditions.

- 131 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 234 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 234 2023/11/28 14:23:57 2023/11/28 14:23:57 FR 1.6 CHARGEMENT EN COURS Comment charger 1 Branchez le cordon dalimentation du chargeur dans une prise secteur. Remarque Des tincelles peuvent tre produites lorsque la fiche est introduite dans la prise dalimentation secteur; toutefois, ceci ne pose aucun problme de scurit. 2 Introduisez soigneusement la batterie autonome dans le chargeur. Alignez les marques dalignement et placez la batterie dans le poste daccueil sur le chargeur. Faites glisser vers lavant dans le sens de la flche. Marques dalignement 3 Pendant la charge, le tmoin sallume. Lorsque la charge est termine, un inter rupteur lectronique sactionne pour protger la batterie. La charge ne peut pas tre ralise si la batterie autonome est chaude (par exemple, la suite dun long travail de perage). Le tmoin dattente orange clignote jusqu ce que la batterie se soit refroidie. La charge commence alors automatiquement. 4 Le tmoin de charge (vert) clignote lentement ds que la batterie est charge environ 80%. 5 Lorsque le chargement est termin, le tmoin de charge de couleur verte steint. 6 Lorsque la temprature de la batterie autonome est de 0 C ou moins, la batterie autonome prend plus longtemps charger que la dure standard. Mme lorsque la batterie est complte ment charge, elle naura quenviron 50%

de la puissance dune batterie compltement charge une temprature de fonctionnement normale.

- 132 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 235 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 235 2023/11/28 14:23:57 2023/11/28 14:23:57 FR 1.6 CHARGEMENT EN COURS 7 Consultez un distributeur agr si le tmoin de charge (vert) ne steint pas. 8 Si une batterie compltement charge est nouveau insre dans le chargeur, le tmoin de charge sallume. Aprs quelques minutes, le tmoin de charge de couleur verte steindra. 9 Retirez la batterie autonome lorsque le bouton de libration de batterie autonome est en position haute. INDICATION DU VOYANT Chargement termin. (Pleine charge) La batterie est charge environ 80%. Chargement en cours. Le chargeur est branch dans la prise secteur. Prt pour la charge.

(Vert)

(Orange) Tmoin de ltat de charge Gauche: vert Droite: orange saffichent. La batterie autonome est froide. La batterie autonome est charge lentement pour rduire leffort de la batterie. La batterie autonome est chaude. La charge commence lorsque la temprature de la batterie autonome descend. Lorsque la temprature de la batterie autonome est de 10 C ou moins, le tmoin de charge (orange) se met galement clignoter. La charge commence lorsque la temprature de la batterie autonome augmente. Impossible de charger. Colmatage par la poussire ou mauvais fonctionnement de la batterie autonome. teint Allum Clignote

- 133 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 236 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 236 2023/11/28 14:23:57 2023/11/28 14:23:57 FR 1.6 CHARGEMENT EN COURS Dclaration sur le brouillage de la Commission Fdrale des Communications Cet quipement a t test et dclar conforme aux limites des appareils numriques de classe B, conformment a la section 15 du rglement de la FCC. Ces limites ont t dfinies pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre les brouillages prjudiciables dans une installation rsidentielle. Cet quipement produit, utilise et peut mettre des nergies de frquence radio et sil nest pas install conformment aux instructions, il pourra provoquer des brouillages prjudiciables aux communications radio. Il ny a toutefois aucune garantie que ces brouillages ne se produisent pas lors dune installation particulire. Si cet quipement provoque des brouillages prjudiciables la rception de la radio ou de la tlvision, ce qui peut tre vrifi en mettant en marche puis en arrtant lquipement, lutilisateur est encourag liminer le brouillage selon lune des mesures suivantes:

Rorienter ou dplacer lantenne rceptrice. Augmenter lespacement entre lquipement et le rcepteur. Brancher lquipement une prise dun circuit diffrent de celui auquel le rcepteur est branch. Consulter un distributeur ou un technicien de radio tlvision expriment pour obtenir une aide. Avertissement de la FCC: afin dassurer la continuit de la conformit, installer et utiliser selon les instructions donnes. Utiliser seulement les blocs batteries spcifis dans les instructions. Tout changement ou modification non expressment approuv par les parties responsables de la conformit pourraient faire perdre lutilisateur le droit de faire fonctionner cet quipement. Cet appareil est conforme au chapitre 15 du rglement de la FCC. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) cet appareil ne peut pas provoquer de brouillage prjudiciable et (2) cet appareil doit pouvoir accepter nimporte quel brouillage reu incluant ceux qui pourraient provoquer un fonctionnement non dsir. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

- 134 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 237 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 237 2023/11/28 14:23:57 2023/11/28 14:23:57 FR 1.7 CONFIGURATIONS DOUTIL AVANT UTILISATION 1 Maintenez le levier dinversion marche avant/marche arrire au centre pour le maintenir dans une position de verrouillage. Centre Position de verrouillage 2 Fixez une fiche. Retirez un anneau en caoutchouc et une goupille de la fiche. Anneau en caoutchouc Rainure Goupille Insrez la fiche dans loutil.

(Alignez leurs positions dorifice.) Inversez la procdure , fixez la goupille et lanneau en caoutchouc. Veillez placer lanneau en caoutchouc de manire ce que la goupille ne sorte pas. La bague de retenue (bague C) sert pour une fixation provisoire. Veillez utiliser la goupille et lanneau en caoutchouc pour mettre la fiche en place. Si vous utilisez une douille use ou dforme, une enclume de la bague de retenue (bague C) risque de ne pas tre insre. 3 Mettez en place la batterie autonome en alignant les marques dalignement. Faites-la coulisser jusqu ce que ltiquette rouge ne soit plus visible et assurez-vous quelle est bien mise en place et ne puisse pas se dtacher. tiquette rouge

- 135 -

Clic Marques dalignement EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 238 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 238 2023/11/28 14:23:57 2023/11/28 14:23:57 FR 2.1 FONCTIONNEMENT DE BASE 2.1.1 MODE DE FONCTIONNEMENT DE LOUTIL Loutil fonctionne dans lun des modes suivants. Le mode dans lequel il est utilis actuellement est indiqu sur laffichage du panneau de commande. Affichage Affichage Nom du mode Dtails du mode Stand Alone Mode Dans ce mode, loutil fonctionne suivant les paramtres configurs enregistrs lintrieur. Les donnes du journal de lhistorique sont enregistres dans la mmoire interne de loutil. Loutil ne communique pas avec le contrleur. Le logiciel Tool Manager permet de changer la configuration sur

[Stand Alone Mode]. Se reporter 2.2.8 Wireless Communication Mode Il sagit dun mode dans lequel loutil est command via une communication sans fil. Loutil communique avec le contrleur pour envoyer les donnes du journal dhistorique et recevoir les paramtres configurs. Se reporter 2.2.9 Operation Disable Mode Loutil a t verrouill par un signal dinterdiction de fonctionnement du contrleur dans le wireless communication mode. Il sera dverrouill par un signal de libration du contrleur. Pairing mode Ce mode permet de vrifier ltat de lappariement. Cela peut aussi tre effectu sur le contrleur. Se reporter 3.3 Minimum Output Mode Offset Mode Dans ce mode, il est vrifi que la commande de couple est disponible lorsque le couple cible est bas. Loutil est arrt au nombre minimum dimpulsions. Le logiciel Tool Manager permet de changer la configuration sur

[Minimum Output Mode]. Cela peut aussi tre effectu sur le contrleur. Se reporter 2.2.8 Dans ce mode, le couple calcul de loutil est corrig au couple rel. Le logiciel Tool Manager permet de changer la configuration sur

[Offset Mode]. Cela peut aussi tre effectu sur le contrleur. Se reporter 2.2.8 Factory Default Mode Dans ce mode, ltat par dfaut de loutil est celui rgl en usine. Slectionnez [Stand Alone Mode] or [Wireless Communication Mode] selon votre utilisation prvue du logiciel Tool Manager avant utilisation.

- 136 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 239 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 239 2023/11/28 14:23:57 2023/11/28 14:23:57 FR 2.1 FONCTIONNEMENT DE BASE 2.1.2 FONCTION DE CONTRLE DE COUPLE Le couple de serrage pour la cible de travail est calcul par le capteur de couple de loutil. Lorsque la valeur de couple calcule atteint la valeur cible prdfinie, loutil est cens sarrter automatiquement.

(Pour savoir comment dfinir le Shut-Off Torque, Se reporter 2.2.8 .) AVERTISSEMENT Effectuez un contrle quotidien de la performance de couple. Sinon, les boulons seront desserrs suite au changement de couple et cela peut causer un accident. MISE EN GARDE Durant le travail, linterrupteur gchette doit tre tir fond. Sil nest pas suffisamment enfonc, la commande de couple ne fonctionne pas et loutil ne sarrte pas automatiquement. Durant le travail, si une charge sur le parcours est suprieure au couple cible, il se peut que les boulons ne soient pas serrs parce que la charge est considre comme le couple cible. Durant le travail, si des membres varient, le couple de serrage peut varier mme si le couple dfini est le mme. Si vous serrez le mme boulon deux fois, un serrage excessif peut entraner une rupture du boulon ou la partie boulonne peut se dformer. Le couple de serrage varie selon les conditions de travail. Rglez-le en fonction du travail rel. Le couple de serrage de boulon peut varier selon les facteurs suivants. Diamtre du boulon (gnralement, au fur et mesure que le diamtre slargit, le couple de serrage augmente), coefficient de couple (indiqu par le fabricant de boulons), calibre, longueur, prsence de rondelle et type, etc. Longueur, qualit du matriau, degr de dtrioration, utilisation de joint universel, utilisation dun adaptateur de prise, utilisation dune fiche multiprise, etc. Qualit du matriau, finition de la surface de roulement, etc. Boulon Prise tat dune partie serrer Mthode de travail Comment positionner loutil sur un boulon, dfinir la force de maintien de loutil, comment tirer linterrupteur gchette, etc.

- 137 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 240 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 240 2023/11/28 14:23:57 2023/11/28 14:23:57 FR 2.1 FONCTIONNEMENT DE BASE 2.1.3 MODE DUTILISATION 1 Choisissez marche avant ou marche arrire avec le levier dinversion de marche avant/marche arrire et actionnez linterrupteur gchette. Lactionnement de linterrupteur gchette peut retarder le dbut de la rotation pendant un moment, mais ceci ne reprsente pas un dysfonctionnement. En cas dune activation/dsactivation rapide, le dbut de la rotation sera un peu retarde. Si vous continuez tirer sur linterrupteur gchette pour effectuer des rotations de manire continue, une erreur (EA) de loutil peut se produire et loutil peut sarrter automatiquement parce que les donnes enregistrables par travail excdent la limite suprieure. La plage de temprature de fonctionnement des batteries autonomes au lithium-ion est comprise entre 0 C et 40 C. Si une batterie autonome froide dune temprature de 0 C ou moins est utilise telle quelle dans une rgion froide etc., loutil peut ne pas fonctionner normalement. Dans ce cas, avant lutilisation, laissez la batterie autonome dans un lieu o la temprature est de 10 C ou plus pendant 1 heure ou plus pour accrotre sa temprature. Lorsque la temprature a augment, utilisez la batterie autonome. Marche avant Marche arrire Juste 1 seconde aprs la mise en place dune batterie autonome, un fonctionnement avec linterrupteur gchette enfonc nest pas accept. MISE EN GARDE Attendez que le moteur sarrte avant dactionner le levier dinversion marche avant/

marche arrire. Si le levier est actionn alors que le moteur nest pas compltement larrt, cela entrane un dysfonctionnement.

- 138 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 241 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 241 2023/11/28 14:23:58 2023/11/28 14:23:58 FR 2.1 FONCTIONNEMENT DE BASE 2.1.3 MODE DUTILISATION 2 Consultez laffichage du tmoin de confirmation de serrage pour vrifier si la commande de couple a fonctionn. Pour laffichage du tmoin de confirmation de serrage, Se reporter 2.1.4 . Remarque Lors de la marche arrire, les tmoins de confirmation de serrage ne sallument pas. Les tmoins steignent lorsque vous tirez linterrupteur gchette. Tmoin de confirmation de serrage Pour utiliser loutil dans une suspension, slectionnez une suspension qui ne gnera pas linterrupteur gchette de loutil. Si la suspension gne linterrupteur gchette, celui-ci sera enfonc de sorte que la batterie conome dcharge de llectricit, entranant un dysfonctionnement de la batterie autonome.

- 139 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 242 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 242 2023/11/28 14:23:58 2023/11/28 14:23:58 FR 2.1 FONCTIONNEMENT DE BASE 2.1.4 TMOIN DE CONFIRMATION DE SERRAGE ET TMOIN DE COMMUNICATION Vous pouvez vrifier le rsultat de serrage et ltat de communication en vrifiant les tmoins LED sur loutil. Tmoin de confirmation de serrage Affichage du tmoin de confirmation de serrage Affichage de tmoin Vert Allum pendant 2 s

+ Avertisseur sonore

(selon le rglage) Signification de laffichage Dtails Travail jug OK La tche de serrage a atteint le couple darrt dfini avec succs. Rouge Allum pendant 2 s

+ Avertisseur sonore

(selon le rglage) Rouge Allum en permanence

+ Buzzer Orange Orange Clignote en permanence

+ Buzzer Allum en permanence

+ Buzzer Travail jug NOK Erreur de loutil Activation automatique de la mise hors tension Frquence dentretien Alarme Mode de verrouillage Erreur de communication La tche de serrage na pas atteint le couple darrt dfini. Pour la cause de linachvement, vrifiez le contenu du journal de lhistorique dans le logiciel Tool Manager. Se reporter 2.2.12 Si une erreur est indique sur laffichage du panneau de commande, engagez une action en fonction de la description de lerreur. Se reporter 4.3.1 Si le tmoin indicateur de la batterie clignote, remplacez la batterie autonome. Loutil est verrouill parce quil a atteint lchance dentretien dfinie dans

[Maintenance Interval Alarm]. Vrifiez aussi que la valeur de rglage (1 99) et 0 saffichent en alternance sur laffichage du panneau de commande. Se reporter 2.2.10 Engagez une action selon la description de lerreur indique sur laffichage du panneau de commande. Se reporter 4.3.1 Hors de la plage de communication sans fil Vrifiez aussi que E9 est indiqu sur laffichage du panneau de commande. Si cela est correct, allez dans la plage de communication sans fil.

- 140 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 243 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 243 2023/11/28 14:23:58 2023/11/28 14:23:58 FR 2.1 FONCTIONNEMENT DE BASE 2.1.4 TMOIN DE CONFIRMATION DE SERRAGE ET TMOIN DE COMMUNICATION Vous pouvez vrifier le rsultat de serrage et ltat de communication en vrifiant les tmoins LED sur loutil. Tmoin de communication Affichage du tmoin de communication Affichage de tmoin Signification de laffichage Dtails Bleu Clignotement rapide

(cycle de 0,2 s) En cours de communication Bleu Allum en permanence USB connect Lorsque le tmoin de communication clignote rapidement, cela signifie que certaines communications se sont produites lintrieur de loutil ou entre loutil et des dispositifs externes. Ne tirez pas le cble USB ou la batterie autonome tant quil/elle ne se dtache. Lorsque loutil est connect avec le logiciel Tool Manager sur votre PC ou tablette, le tmoin de communication sallume. Bleu Bleu Bleu Clignotement rapide

(cycle de 0,2 s) Appariement en cours Le tmoin de communication clignote rapidement pendant lappariement en cours. Clignotement lent

(cycle de 1 s) Reconnexion en cours Le tmoin de communication clignote lentement lorsque la reconnexion est en cours. Clignotement

(cycle de 0,2 s)

+ signal sonore Appariement termin Le tmoin de communication commence clignoter lentement (cycle de 0,5 s) une fois lappariement termin. Une fois lappariement termin, loutil passe en tat En attente dun signal sans fil ou en tat Fonctionnement sans fil interdit lors dune commande du contrleur. Bleu Clignotement lent

(cycle de 1 s) En attente dun signal sans fil Le tmoin de communication clignote lentement lorsque loutil est en mode de communication sans fil. Arrt Fonctionnement sans fil interdit Le fonctionnement de loutil est dsactiv par un signal dinterdiction de fonctionnement du contrleur.

- 141 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 244 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 244 2023/11/28 14:23:58 2023/11/28 14:23:58 FR 2.1 FONCTIONNEMENT DE BASE 2.1.5 FONCTIONS DU PANNEAU DE COMMANDE Lalimentation est mise hors tension lorsque tous les tmoins sur le panneau de commande sont teints. Tirez linterrupteur gchette une fois pour activer loutil avant de le mettre en marche. Dans les cas suivants, lalimentation sera mise sur OFF pour arrter le vidage de la batterie et la lumire DEL et tous les affichages steignent. Juste aprs la mise en place dune batterie autonome Lorsque vous navez rien actionn pendant la priode suivante En mode [Stand Alone Mode]: Environ 5 minutes En mode [Wireless Communication Mode]: Environ 120 minutes Lorsque le logiciel Tool Manager est connect : Environ 20 minutes Utilisation de la lumire DEL La lumire DEL peut tre change avec le bouton lumineux Marche/Arrt et rgle parmi les options Li au dclencheur, Toujours allum, Toujours teint. Lorsque vous appuyez une fois sur le bouton, ltat prsent sera indiqu sur laffichage du panneau de commande. Ensuite, chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton, les rglages de la lumire DEL changeront. Remarque Lorsque la lumire est allume, si vous navez effectu aucune opration pendant environ 5 minutes, la lumire steint automatiquement. La lumire utilise seulement un peu de courant pour sallumer. Cela a peu dimpact sur la capacit de travail de loutil. Affichage Rglages de la lumire DEL d1 d2 d3 Li un dclencheur Affichage Toujours allum Toujours teint

- 142 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 245 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 245 2023/11/28 14:23:58 2023/11/28 14:23:58 FR 2.1 FONCTIONNEMENT DE BASE 2.1.5 FONCTIONS DU PANNEAU DE COMMANDE Comment lire le tmoin indicateur de la batterie Vous pouvez vrifier le niveau de batterie restant. Utilisez le niveau de batterie restant comme rfrence, car il varie sensiblement avec la temprature ambiante, les caractristiques de la batterie, etc. Affichage de ltat Niveau de batterie restant Plein Environ 40% ou moins Tmoin indicateur de la batterie Environ 20% ou moins (temps de charge) Chargez la batterie autonome de manire anticipe. Clignotement Pas de niveau de batterie restante Chargez la batterie autonome. (Activation automatique de la Clignotement mise hors tension) Voir ci-dessous la description de lactivation automatique de la mise hors tension. Fonction de mise hors tension automatique Affichage de ltat Clignotement Cette fonction permet de mettre loutil hors tension lorsque la tension de la batterie chute un certain niveau. Lors de son activation, mme si vous tirez linterrupteur gchette, loutil ne se dplace pas tant que vous ne chargez pas la batterie autonome (ou si vous ne la remplacez pas par une autre batterie autonome qui est charge). Remarque Lorsque la mise hors tension automatique est active, les trois segments du tmoin indicateur de la batterie clignotent. Par ailleurs, le tmoin de confirmation de serrage sallume aussi en rouge. Lorsque le tmoin clignote, chargez la batterie autonome immdiatement (ou remplacez-

la par une autre batterie autonome qui est charge). La batterie autonome pour laquelle la mise hors tension automatique est active doit tre charge compltement. Si la charge nest pas suffisante, la fonction de mise hors tension automatique peut ne pas tre annule.

- 143 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 246 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 246 2023/11/28 14:23:59 2023/11/28 14:23:59 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.1 INSTALLATION ET MISE JOUR DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER Avant dutiliser loutil, installez le logiciel Tool Manager sur votre PC ou tablette en suivant la procdure ci-aprs. Prparation :

Prparez un PC ou une tablette avec le systme dexploitation support install.

(Pour le systme dexploitation support, Se reporter 3.2 .) Installation 1 Tlchargez le programme dinstallation du logiciel Tool Manager depuis notre site Web. Pour savoir comment installer le logiciel Tool Manager, Se reporter 1.1.1 . 2 Ouvrez le dossier dans lequel vous avez enregistr le programme dinstallation tlcharg et dmarrez Install.exe . 3 Lorsque le programme dinstallation saffiche, slectionnez

[Next] (). 4 Lcran pour slectionner un dossier dinstallation saffiche. Pour installer le logiciel dans le dossier par dfaut, slectionnez [Next] (). Pour linstaller dans un autre dossier, tapez le chemin daccs dans Folder () ou slectionnez [Browse] () puis slectionnez le dossier dinstallation souhait. Vous pouvez vrifier si le lecteur dinstallation a la capacit suffisante en slectionnant [Disc Cost] ().

(version)

- 144 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 247 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 247 2023/11/28 14:23:59 2023/11/28 14:23:59 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.1 INSTALLATION ET MISE JOUR DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 5 Lorsque lcran de confirmation dinstallation saffiche, slectionnez [Next] (). 6 Lorsque la fentre de dialogue Windows saffiche pour autoriser lapplication effectuer des modifications de votre dispositif, slectionnez [Yes]. 7 Linstallation du logiciel Tool Manager dmarre. Lorsque la notification confirmant que linstallation sest termine avec succs, saffiche, slectionnez [Close] (). 8 Linstallation est termine si licne de Tool Manager saffiche sur le bureau. Mise jour Vous pouvez mettre jour le logiciel Tool Manager en le rinstallant avec une nouvelle version du programme dinstallation.

(La dsinstallation nest pas ncessaire avant la mise jour.) Au moment de linstallation, confirmez les informations de version affiches sur lcran initial du programme dinstallation.

- 145 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 248 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 248 2023/11/28 14:23:59 2023/11/28 14:23:59 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.2 DSINSTALLATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER Vous pouvez dsinstaller le logiciel Tool Manager en effectuant la procdure Windows standard pour la dsinstallation de lapplication. La dsinstallation du logiciel Tool Manager nefface pas les donnes du journal de lhistorique, les paramtres configurs et les paramtres doption qui seront rcuprs si le logiciel Tool Manager est rinstall. Slectionnez Tool Manager via lun des menus Windows suivants et excutez la dsinstallation.

(Pour (1) et (3), faites un clic droit pour afficher loption de dsinstallation.)

(1)

(Menu Dmarrer) Remarque Pour (1), loption de dsinstallation napparat pas si vous navez pas encore redmarr votre dispositif depuis linstallation du logiciel Tool Manager.

(2) Apps & features

(Paramtres Windows) Apps Apps & features)

(3) Programs and Features

(Control Panel Programs Programs and Features)

- 146 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 249 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 249 2023/11/28 14:23:59 2023/11/28 14:23:59 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.3 RPARATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER Vous pouvez rparer le logiciel Tool Manager via son programme dinstallation. Essayez cette procdure si le logiciel Tool Manager ne dmarre pas. 1 Sur votre PC ou tablette avec le logiciel Tool Manager install, dmarrez le programme dinstallation du logiciel Tool Manager tel quil est dcrit dans 2.2.1. 2 Lorsque lcran pour rparer ou supprimer Tool Manager est affich, slectionnez Repair Tool Manager_EYFSW102 () et cliquez sur [Finish] (). 3 La rparation du logiciel Tool Manager dmarre. Lorsque la notification confirmant que la rparation sest termine avec succs, saffiche, slectionnez [Close] ().

- 147 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 250 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 250 2023/11/28 14:23:59 2023/11/28 14:23:59 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.4 DMARRER/QUITTER LE LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER Vous devez dmarrer et quitter le logiciel Tool Manager en suivant la procdure ci-aprs. Dmarrez le logiciel Tool Manager Pour dmarrer le logiciel Tool Manager, slectionnez Tool Manager sur le bureau ou partir du menu Dmarrer de Windows. Quittez le logiciel Tool Manager Pour quitter le logiciel Tool Manager, slectionnez [Exit] dans [File] () ou slectionnez le bouton [x] () en haut droite de la fentre.

- 148 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 251 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 251 2023/11/28 14:23:59 2023/11/28 14:23:59 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.5 CONNEXION/DCONNEXION DE LOUTIL Loutil et votre PC ou tablette sur lequel le logiciel Tool Manager est install peuvent tre utiliss en les connectant avec un cble USB. Prparation : Mettez en place une batterie autonome charge sur loutil. Dmarrez le logiciel Tool Manager install sur votre PC ou tablette. Connecteur USB Un port USB se trouve en bas du logement larrire de loutil. Ouvrez le couvercle avant utilisation. Connecteur USB (ct outil) : USB Type-C USB Type-C est une marque dpose de USB Implementers Forum.

- 149 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 252 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 252 2023/11/28 14:24:00 2023/11/28 14:24:00 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.5 CONNEXION/DCONNEXION DE LOUTIL Connectez loutil gchette pour mettre sous tension. 1 Si loutil nest pas mis sous tension, tirez linterrupteur 2 Connectez loutil votre PC ou tablette avec un cble USB. MISE EN GARDE Tenez la fiche et insrez-la ou retirez-la tout droit. Si vous linsrez en diagonale, le connecteur sera dform et entranera un dysfonctionnement. Si vous excutez les tapes 2 1 ci-dessus dans cet ordre, la connexion risque dchouer. 3 Lorsque la fentre de dialogue dappariement saffiche, slectionnez [Pair Tool]. En fonction du systme dexploitation, laffichage peut tre diffrent. Remarque Sil ny a pas dinformations de numro de srie sur loutil, slectionnez un numro de modle doutil et entrez le numro de srie indiqu dans la fentre de dialogue dappariement.

(Le numro de srie est imprim sur la plaque de couleur de loutil.) En fonction du systme dexploitation, laffichage peut tre diffrent. Plaque de couleur

- 150 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 253 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 253 2023/11/28 14:24:00 2023/11/28 14:24:00 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.5 CONNEXION/DCONNEXION DE LOUTIL 4 Si lhorloge interne dun outil diffre de lhorloge de votre PC ou tablette de 10 secondes ou plus, un message dans la fentre de dialogue vous demande de corriger lheure de lhorloge interne pour quelle corresponde celle de votre PC ou tablette. Slectionnez [OK] pour effectuer la correction or slectionnez [Cancel] pour sauter ce processus sans corriger lhorloge. Lheure de lhorloge interne de loutil est reflte dans le journal de lhistorique dans

[Stand Alone Mode]. En fonction du systme dexploitation, laffichage peut tre diffrent. 5 Loutil connect est ajout en haut de la liste doutils dans le logiciel Tool Manager. Une fois ajout dans la liste doutils, loutil reste dans la liste mme sil est dconnect.

(Si le nombre doutils dans la liste excde 10, loutil le plus ancien slectionn sera masqu.)

- 151 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 254 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 254 2023/11/28 14:24:00 2023/11/28 14:24:00 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.5 CONNEXION/DCONNEXION DE LOUTIL Dconnectez loutil Dbranchez le cble USB de loutil ou du PC ou de la tablette connect. MISE EN GARDE Si le tmoin de communication (bleu) sur loutil clignote rapidement (cycle de 0,2 s), cela signifie que les donnes sont en train dtre communiques. Ne dconnectez pas le cble USB, sinon les donnes en cours de communication risquent dtre endommages. Ne travaillez pas avec le cble USB connect loutil. Avant de lutiliser pour le travail, fermez le cache du connecteur USB de manire sre en lenfonant compltement.

- 152 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 255 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 255 2023/11/28 14:24:00 2023/11/28 14:24:00 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.6 PRSENTATION DE LCRAN DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER Nom Aperu Barre de menus Ouvre les menus et les fentres de fichiers, doptions et laide. Liste doutils Cette liste permet de slectionner loutil actionner. Affichage des informations doutil Le numro de modle et le numro de srie de loutil slectionn sont affichs. Icne de configuration de dispositif Affichage de longlet de changement Liste dhistorique Ouvre les fentres de [Tool Settings] et [Tool Info]. Permet de commuter entre lcran de liste dhistorique/

affichage de lhistorique et lcran de liste de paramtres/

saisie de paramtres. Cette liste permet de slectionner un dossier de journal dhistorique afficher. Chaque fois quun journal dhistorique est import, il est enregistr dans un nouveau dossier cr. Affichage dhistorique La liste des journaux dhistorique dans le dossier de journal dhistorique est affiche.

- 153 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 256 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 256 2023/11/28 14:24:00 2023/11/28 14:24:00 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.6 PRSENTATION DE LCRAN DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER Nom Aperu Liste de paramtres cran de saisie de paramtres Cette liste permet de slectionner un fichier de paramtres configurs diter. Il peut tre slectionn partir des donnes enregistres dans loutil en cours de connexion ou le logiciel Tool Manager. Cet cran sert saisir les paramtres configurs.

- 154 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 257 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 257 2023/11/28 14:24:00 2023/11/28 14:24:00 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.7 GESTION DE LOUTIL PARTIR DE LA LISTE DOUTILS Un outil devant tre actionn avec le logiciel Tool Manager est slectionn dans la liste doutils. La liste doutils affiche les outils connects avec le logiciel Tool Manager ou les outils connects auparavant. (Jusqu 9 outils peuvent tre affichs.) Les donnes sont communiques pendant que le tmoin de communication (bleu) sur loutil clignote (cycle de 0,2 s). Ne dbranchez pas le cble USB. Dans le cas contraire, les donnes communiques risquent dtre corrompues. Larticle de chaque outil dans la liste doutils affiche les informations de numro de modle doutil, numro de srie et tat de connexion. Numro de modle doutil Numro de srie tat de connexion Ajouter la liste doutils Lorsque vous appariez loutil avec le logiciel Tool Manager, il sera affich automatiquement dans la liste doutils. Mme si loutil est dconnect, il reste dans la liste doutils en tant quoutil dconnect.

(Si le nombre doutils dans la liste excde 10, loutil le plus ancien slectionn sera masqu.)

- 155 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 258 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 258 2023/11/28 14:24:01 2023/11/28 14:24:01 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.7 GESTION DE LOUTIL PARTIR DE LA LISTE DOUTILS Masquer loutil Loutil dans un tat dconnect peut tre masqu dans la liste doutils.

(Les donnes de loutil masqu restent dans le logiciel Tool Manager, et elles peuvent tre rappeles avec [Open Tool].) 1 Slectionnez un outil dconnect dans la liste doutils et cliquez sur [Hide]. 2 Lorsque la fentre de dialogue saffiche avec un message demandant de masquer loutil, slectionnez [Hide], et loutil slectionn sera masqu dans la liste doutils.

- 156 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 259 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 259 2023/11/28 14:24:01 2023/11/28 14:24:01 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.7 GESTION DE LOUTIL PARTIR DE LA LISTE DOUTILS Rappeler loutil Loutil masqu peut tre rappel avec [Open Tool]. 1 Cliquez sur [Open Tool] pour afficher la fentre de dialogue et ouvrir les outils. 2 Slectionnez un numro de srie de loutil afficher dans la liste

[Hidden tools] (), cliquez sur [Open] (), et dplacez-le dans la liste [Tools to display] ().

(Jusqu 9 outils peuvent tre dfinis dans la liste doutils affiche.) 3 Pour masquer loutil affich, masquez-le dans la liste [Tools to display]. Slectionnez un numro de srie de loutil, cliquez sur [Hide] (), et dplacez-le dans la liste [Hidden tools] . (Loutil connect ne peut pas tre masqu.) 4 Lorsque vous avez slectionn un outil afficher ou masquer, cliquez sur [Set] () pour rafrachir la liste doutils.

- 157 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 260 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 260 2023/11/28 14:24:01 2023/11/28 14:24:01 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.7 GESTION DE LOUTIL PARTIR DE LA LISTE DOUTILS Supprimer loutil Loutil dans un tat dconnect peut tre supprim de la liste doutils. Les donnes du journal dhistorique de loutil supprim sont compltement effaces du logiciel Tool Manager. Du fait que le journal dhistorique effac ne peut pas tre restaur, il est recommand den faire une sauvegarde.

(Pour savoir comment faire une sauvegarde, Se reporter 2.2.14 .) 1 Slectionnez un outil dconnect dans la liste doutils et cliquez sur [Delete]. 2 Lorsque la fentre de dialogue saffiche avec un message demandant de supprimer loutil, slectionnez [Delete], loutil slectionn sera supprim de la liste doutils et les donnes du journal dhistorique seront compltement effaces.

- 158 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 261 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 261 2023/11/28 14:24:01 2023/11/28 14:24:01 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL Cet outil peut tre utilis en configurant les paramtres qui spcifient le fonctionnement.

(1) Comment utiliser les paramtres Stand Alone Mode Loutil est actionn en fonction des paramtres enregistrs dans sa mmoire interne. Lors de la configuration Lors du travail Cble USB Se reporter (7) dans cette section Paramtres Enregistrement des paramtres depuis le logiciel Tool Manager Mise en marche en fonction des paramtres dans loutil

- 159 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 262 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 262 2023/11/28 14:24:01 2023/11/28 14:24:01 FR

2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL Divers paramtres de loutil peuvent tre configurs depuis le logiciel Tool Manager.

(2) Slectionnez un fichier de paramtres diter Le fichier de paramtres peut tre slectionn de lune des quatre manires suivantes. Slection du fichier de paramtres enregistr dans loutil 1 Dans la liste doutils (), slectionnez un outil connect pour lequel vous ditez les paramtres configurs. 2 Slectionnez Parameter sur longlet de changement daffichage

(), et cliquez sur [Read From Connected Tool] (). Slection du fichier de paramtres enregistr dans le logiciel Tool Manager

( Se reporter (8) dans cette section fou comment sauvegarder le fichier de paramtres.) Slectionnez Parameter sur longlet de changement daffichage (), et cliquez sur un fichier de paramtres souhait ().

- 160-

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 263 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 263 2023/11/28 14:24:01 2023/11/28 14:24:01 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL Slection du fichier de paramtres enregistr au format de fichier CSV

( Se reporter (8) dans cette section pour savoir comment exporter le fichier de paramtres au format CSV.) 1 Slectionnez Parameter sur longlet de changement daffichage

(), et cliquez sur [Import Parameter File] (). Lorsque Ouvrir une fentre de dialogue saffiche, slectionnez le fichier CSV qui a un fichier de paramtres diter. 2 Le fichier de paramtres slectionn est nouvellement ajout la liste de paramtres (), et vous devez donc cliquer sur ce fichier de paramtres. Nouvelle cration dun fichier de paramtres et slection du fichier Lorsque vous slectionnez [Create New] dans la partie suprieure de la liste des paramtres (), la fentre [Copy Parameter] souvre, vous permettant dentrer un nom denregistrement des paramtres et un commentaire supplmentaire. Ils seront enregistrs en cliquant sur [Add] ().

( Le nom denregistrement et le commentaire supplmentaire peuvent comporter chacun 25 caractres un octet ou 15 caractres deux octets.)

( Le nom denregistrement ne peut pas inclure les caractres \, /, :, *, ?, , < et >. De plus, le nom denregistrement ne peut pas commencer par un espace.) Remarque Le numro de modle du paramtre est dfini automatiquement sur le numro de loutil slectionn dans la liste doutils. Chaque paramtre a la valeur par dfaut du modle doutil slectionn lorsque le nouveau fichier de paramtres est cr.

- 161 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 264 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 264 2023/11/28 14:24:02 2023/11/28 14:24:02 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL

(3) Configurer les paramtres basiques Lorsque vous slectionnez un fichier de paramtres, lcran dentre de paramtre sera affich. Configurez chaque paramtre en entrant une valeur numrique, en slectionnant une option ou en slectionnant ON/OFF. (Pour des informations sur chaque lment de paramtre, Se reporter 2.2.9 .) Saisie dune valeur numrique Slection dune option Slection de ON/OFF Pour llment avec le symbole de point dinterrogation (

de cet lment en plaant le curseur sur le pont dinterrogation.

), vous pouvez lire lexplication

- 162 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 265 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 265 2023/11/28 14:24:02 2023/11/28 14:24:02 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL

(4) Configurer les dcalages La valeur de couple indique par loutil et le couple rel sur le dispositif de fixation peut diffrer selon lamortissement cause par la douille et/ou ltat du joint. Dans ce cas, la valeur de couple indique par loutil peut tre rgle par le rglage Offset. 50.0 Nm 45.0 Nm 50.0 Nm 50.0 Nm Dcalage Pour la premire application, slectionnez [Adjust Torque Offset] () dans Offset sur lcran de saisie des paramtres configurs pour calculer les valeurs de dcalage automatiquement. Si les valeurs de dcalage prcdemment dfinies pour loutil utilis pour le travail existent dj, vous pouvez dfinir la mme performance de couple sur loutil en entrant ces valeurs dans [Offset_Slope] et [Offset_Intercept] () sur lcran de saisie des paramtres configurs.

(Pour plus de dtails sur [Offset_Slope] et [Offset_Intercept], Se reporter 2.2.9 .) Lorsque vous slectionnez [Default] (), vous pouvez remplacer les valeurs par dfaut du modle par les valeurs de dcalage. Remarque Pour dfinir les dcalages, vous devez vider les donnes du journal dhistorique dans la mmoire interne de loutil. Aprs laffichage de la bote de dialogue une fois

[Adjust Torque Offset] slectionn, sauvegardez et supprimez les donnes du journal dhistorique.

(Les donnes du journal dhistorique sont enregistres dans la liste dhistorique.)

- 163 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 266 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 266 2023/11/28 14:24:02 2023/11/28 14:24:02 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL Lorsque vous slectionnez [Adjust Torque Offset] puis, aprs laffichage de la bote de dialogue, sauvegardez et supprimez les donnes du journal dhistorique lintrieur de loutil, la fentre de configuration de dcalage souvrira. Effectuez la procdure suivante pour configurer les dcalages. 1 Slectionnez une [Socket Extension Length] () pour une utilisation depuis le menu droulant.

(Si la longueur qui correspond la douille utiliser nest pas trouve, slectionnez la longueur la plus proche.) 2 Entrez une valeur numrique qui reprsente [Shut-off Torque]

(). 3 Slectionnez [Continue Offset] () pour enregistrer les rglages de loutil.

- 164 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 267 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 267 2023/11/28 14:24:02 2023/11/28 14:24:02 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL 4 Retirez loutil du cble USB une fois et effectuez un travail de serrage sur le testeur de couple ou le boulon concern. 5 Vrifiez le rsultat de couple indiqu par le testeur de couple ou la cl dynamomtrique qui a permis de resserrer le boulon concern (Audit Torque Value). Retirez le cble USB. 50.0 Nm 50.0 Nm

- 165 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 268 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 268 2023/11/28 14:24:02 2023/11/28 14:24:02 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL Manager. 6 Reconnectez le cble USB pour connecter loutil au logiciel Tool 7 Slectionnez [Acquire] () pour importer la valeur de couple mesure par loutil. La valeur importe est indique dans la colonne [Tool Torque Result] () dans la fentre daffichage suprieure. de couple ou la cl dynamomtrique. 8 Entrez la valeur [Audit Torque Value] () vrifie par le testeur 9 Slectionnez [Check] () pour calculer les nouvelles valeurs de dcalage.

( ce stade, les nouvelles valeurs de dcalage calcules nont pas encore t enregistres dans loutil.) 10 Vrifiez en % () la diffrence entre la valeur [Tool Torque Result] () mesure par loutil et la valeur [Audit Torque Value]

() indique dans la fentre daffichage suprieure. 11 Si la diffrence est suffisamment petite, slectionnez [Update &

Exit] () pour terminer le rglage du dcalage. Si la diffrence ci-dessus est toujours importante, slectionnez [Continue Offset] () pour dfinir les nouvelles valeurs de dcalage sur loutil et rptez les tapes 4 11 jusqu ce que la diffrence soit suffisamment petite.

(Lorsque le pourcentage % se situe entre 95,0% et 105,0%, les valeurs de dcalage %,

(pente), et de dcalage (interception) deviennent vertes. Utilisez-les pour rfrence.)

- 166 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 269 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 269 2023/11/28 14:24:02 2023/11/28 14:24:02 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL Remarque Aprs avoir quitt la fentre de configuration de dcalage, vous pouvez sauvegarder les paramtres mis jour dans la liste de paramtres. Si vous ditez un fichier de paramtres lu partir dun outil connect, le fichier de paramtres est nouvellement ajout dans la liste de paramtres. Si vous ditez un fichier de paramtres initialement dans la liste de paramtres, le fichier de paramtres est cras. Le journal dhistorique acquis dans le paramtre de dcalage est enregistr dans le dossier [Offset] dans la liste dhistorique. En vrifiant [Minimum Output Mode] dans la fentre de configuration de dcalage, loutil peut fonctionner en mode [Minimum Output Mode].

(Lorsque vous dcochez [Minimum Output Mode], loutil revient en mode [Offset Mode].) Minimum Output Mode

[Aperu des fonctions]

Lorsque la cible est proche de la limite infrieure de la plage de fonctionnement de commande de couple de loutil, vous pouvez vrifier si la commande de couple est disponible. Dans ce mode, loutil est arrt au nombre minimum dimpulsions (la puissance minimum). Dans ce cas, aucun journal dhistorique nest enregistr. Aprs lexcution dun travail dans ce mode, utilisez un testeur de couple ou une cl dynamomtrique pour vrifier si la puissance de couple de loutil nest pas suprieure au couple cible. Si un surcouple se produit dans ce mode, loutil peut ne pas tre disponible pour un tel travail.

- 167 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 270 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 270 2023/11/28 14:24:03 2023/11/28 14:24:03 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL

(5) Dfinissez un Snug Point Le point dajustement est utilis comme point de rfrence pour diviser les mesures dangle dans langle avant lajustement et dans langle aprs lajustement. Le point dajustement peut tre rgl avec ces trois mthodes : [When Pulsing Starts], [Snug Torque], et [Select From Graph]. Couple Select From Graph Snug Torque 1 When Pulsing Starts Excution libre Impulsions Angle When Pulsing Starts Le moment o loutil a commenc mettre des pulsations est appel le point dajustement. Il est dfini simplement en slectionnant llment. Snug Torque Le moment o le serrage a atteint le couple dfini est appel un point dajustement. Aprs avoir slectionn llment de [Snug Torque], entrez la valeur de [Detection Threshold]. Select From Graph Slectionnez un point dajustement souhait partir des donnes de forme donde de couple. Une augmentation du couple de 1 dans langle de serrage au point slectionn (une pente dans un graphique) est le seuil pour dterminer lajustement. Remarque Sil existe une pente plus marque dans un graphique avant le point slectionn, ce point sera considr comme le point dajustement. Slectionnez llment de [Select From Graph], et cliquez sur [Select Snug Point]. La fentre de graphique souvre.

- 168 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 271 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 271 2023/11/28 14:24:03 2023/11/28 14:24:03 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL La fentre de graphique montre un graphique du journal dhistorique le plus rcent. Le graphique utilis pour la configuration peut tre chang dans le menu droulant ci-dessus (). En slectionnant [Acquire] (), vous pouvez aussi importer un nouveau graphique pour la configuration. La fentre de configuration comprend une fentre principale () qui affiche le graphique entier et une sous-fentre () qui agrandit et affiche nimporte quelle partie du graphique. La plage daffichage de la fentre principale peut tre change en entrant les angles de dbut et de fin dans [X-axis Range] () sous le graphique. La plage daffichage et la taille de la sous-fentre peuvent tre changes librement en dplaant ou changeant la taille du cadre de slection () sur la fentre principale. Agrandi Le cadre de slection peut tre dplac ou redimensionn par glisser-dposer. Le point dajustement est dfini en slectionnant une ligne entre les points sur le graphique depuis la sous-fentre. Sur la ligne entre les points slectionns, le degr daugmentation de couple par rapport langle de serrage avanant de 1 est le seuil pour dterminer le point dajustement (Detection Threshold). Slectionner

- 169 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 272 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 272 2023/11/28 14:24:03 2023/11/28 14:24:03 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL En configurant le [Detection Start Angle], vous pouvez retarder le dbut de la dtection du point dajustement jusqu ce que langle dfini soit atteint. Cette fonction est efficace pour les travaux o une charge est gnre avant lajustement. Le [Detection Start Angle] est dfini en dplaant la barre de slection () sur la fentre principale gauche ou droite. Lorsque vous avez fini de dfinir le seuil de dtection du point dajustement et langle de dbut de dtection du point dajustement, slectionnez [Set] pour quitter la fentre du graphique.

- 170 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 273 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 273 2023/11/28 14:24:03 2023/11/28 14:24:03 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL

(6) Dfinir un niveau de dtection des points darrt Le rglage du niveau de dtection des points darrt est utilis dans les cas suivants. Couple de serrage Rglage du couple de serrage l e v e L n o i t c e t e D i t n o P g u n S

) e g a r r e s r p e d i t n o p u d n o i t c e t d e d u a e v N i

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Serrage termin

(sarrte automatiquement) La charge gnre mi-chemin en raison de la peinture ou du taraudage des vis nest pas dtecte comme un point de prserrage. Charge gnre mi-chemin Charge gnre mi-chemin Charge gnre mi-chemin Charge gnre mi-chemin Lorsque 4 ou moins est dfini, il sera dtect comme un point de prserrage ce qui entranera un arrt mi-chemin. Lorsque 5 ou suprieur est rgl, il nest pas dtect comme point de prserrage. Lorsque 1 est dfini, il est dtect comme un point de prserrage, ce qui entrane un arrt mi-chemin. Lorsque 2 ou suprieur est rgl, il nest pas dtect comme point de prserrage. Dure du serrage Peut tre rgl sur 7 niveaux 7 Prt pour le travail avec une charge leve gnre mi-chemin 1 Rglage pour le travail avec une faible charge gnre mi-chemin 0 Niveau de dtection du point dattache fonction OFF

- 171 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 274 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 274 2023/11/28 14:24:03 2023/11/28 14:24:03 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL Vous pouvez dfinir un niveau de dtection de point darrt partir de lcran de saisie des paramtres de rglage. Entrez une valeur souhaite dans le champ de saisie Snug Point Detection Level . MISE EN GARDE Rglez le snug point detection level (niveau de dtection du point de prserrage) partir de 1. Si vous rglez le snug point detection level (niveau de dtection du point de prserrage) partir de 2-7, le matriau cible risquera de se fissurer ou de se dformer. Si loutil sarrte avant le point de prserrage au snug point detection level (niveau de dtection du point de prserrage) 1, rglez le snug point detection level (niveau de dtection du point de prserrage) 2-7.

- 172 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 275 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 275 2023/11/28 14:24:03 2023/11/28 14:24:03 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL

(7) Enregistrer le fichier de paramtres dfinis dans loutil Lorsque vous slectionnez [Write to Tool], le fichier de paramtres dfinis sera enregistr dans loutil. Remarque

[Write to Tool] est dsactiv et ne peut pas tre slectionn lorsque le numro de modle dans le fichier de paramtres ne correspond pas au numro de modle doutil. Avant lenregistrement, une fentre de dialogue vous permet de vrifier les changements partir des rglages actuellement enregistrs dans loutil. Lors dun travail en mode [Stand Alone Mode], loutil fonctionne suivant les paramtres enregistrs lintrieur. Le fichier de paramtres enregistr dans loutil peut tre transmis et enregistr dans le contrleur via une communication sans fil.

(Pour savoir comment lenregistrer sur le contrleur, lisez les Instructions dutilisation du contrleur.)

- 173 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 276 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 276 2023/11/28 14:24:03 2023/11/28 14:24:03 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL

(8) Grer le fichier de paramtres dfini Le fichier de paramtres dfini peut tre enregistr dans la liste de paramtres. De plus, vous pouvez le grer de diverses manires dans le logiciel Tool Manager. Liste de paramtres craser le fichier de paramtres Lorsque vous slectionnez [Save Parameter] () tout en ditant le fichier de paramtres dans la liste de paramtres (), les modifications seront crases. Sauvegarde supplmentaire du fichier de paramtres Lorsque vous slectionnez [Copy Parameter] (), le fichier de paramtres dfini sera enregistr dans la liste de paramtres (). Vous pouvez dfinir un nom de fichier et un commentaire supplmentaire lorsque vous enregistrez le fichier de paramtres.

(Le nom de fichier et le commentaire supplmentaire peuvent comprendre chacun 25 caractres 1 bit ou 15 caractres 2 bits.)

(Le nom de fichier ne peut pas inclure les caractres \, /, :, *, ?, , < et >. De plus, le nom de fichier ne peut pas commencer par un espace.)

- 174 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 277 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 277 2023/11/28 14:24:03 2023/11/28 14:24:03 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL Ajout dun commentaire dans le fichier de paramtres Lorsque vous slectionnez [Comment] (), un commentaire supplmentaire peut tre dfini dans le fichier de paramtres spcifi.

(Le commentaire supplmentaire peut comprendre jusqu 25 caractres un bit ou 15 caractres deux bits.) Exportation du fichier de paramtres Lors de la slection de [Export] (), vous pouvez exporter le fichier de paramtres dfini au format CSV. Vous pouvez enregistrer le fichier de paramtres de sortie dans le contrleur.

(Pour en savoir plus sur comment lenregistrer sur le contrleur, lisez les Instructions dutilisation du contrleur.)

- 175 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 278 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 278 2023/11/28 14:24:04 2023/11/28 14:24:04 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.8 CONFIGURATION DES PARAMTRES DE LOUTIL Renommer le fichier de paramtres 1 Slectionnez un fichier de paramtres renommer dans la liste de paramtres. 2 Lors de la slection de [Change Name], vous pouvez modifier le nom du fichier de paramtres.

(Le nom de fichier et le commentaire supplmentaire peuvent comprendre chacun 25 caractres 1 bit ou 15 caractres 2 bits.)

(Le nom de fichier ne peut pas inclure les caractres \, /, :, *, ?, , < et >. De plus, le nom de fichier ne peut pas commencer par un espace.) Suppression du fichier de paramtres 1 Slectionnez un fichier de paramtres supprimer dans la liste de paramtres (). Ou slectionnez [...] () sur lcran de saisie des paramtres configurs. 2 Lorsque vous slectionnez [Delete], la bote de dialogue vous demande sil faut supprimer. Lorsque vous slectionnez [OK], le fichier de paramtres enregistr sera supprim.

(Lorsque le fichier de paramtres de loutil connect est slectionn, [Delete] ne saffiche pas mais [Factory Default] saffiche sur [...].)

- 176 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 279 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 279 2023/11/28 14:24:04 2023/11/28 14:24:04 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.9 LISTE DES PARAMTRES Mode Setting

[Aperu des fonctions]

Slectionnez un mode de fonctionnement de loutil.

[Valeur par dfaut]

Factory Default Mode (Fd)

[Valeur de rglage]

Stand Alone Mode (A) :

Les donnes du journal dhistorique sont enregistres dans la mmoire interne. Loutil ne communique pas avec le contrleur. Wireless Communication Mode (C) : Loutil communique avec le contrleur pour envoyer des journaux dhistorique et recevoir des paramtres. Shut-Off Torque

[Aperu des fonctions]

Lorsque le couple de serrage atteint la valeur dfinie de couple darrt, loutil cesse de fonctionner automatiquement. Assurez-vous quil est dans la plage, Torque Upper Limit Shut-Off Torque Torque Lower Limit.

[Valeur par dfaut]

EYFMH1 : 20.0 Nm/177.0 In.lbs/14.7 Ft.lbs EYFMH2 : 50.0 Nm/442.5 In.lbs/36.9 Ft.lbs

[Valeur de rglage]

EYFMH1 : 10.0 Nm 70.0 Nm/88.5 In.lbs 619.5 In.lbs/7.4 Ft.lbs 51.6 Ft.lbs EYFMH2 : 30.0 Nm 140.0 Nm/265.5 In.lbs 1238.9 In.lbs/22.1 Ft.lbs 103.2 Ft.lbs Remarque Le domaine dans lequel lutilisation de cet outil est recommande est la suivante :

EYFMH1 : 20.0 Nm 60.0 Nm/177.0 In.lbs 531.0 In.lbs/14.7 Ft.lbs 44.2 Ft.lbs EYFMH2 : 50.0 Nm 120.0 Nm/442.5 In.lbs 1061.9 In.lbs/36.9 Ft.lbs 88.5 Ft.lbs

( Domaine recommand pour lassemblage de grands composants :

50.0 Nm 80.0 Nm/442.5 In.lbs 708.0 In.lbs/36.9 Ft.lbs 59.0 Ft.lbs) Torque Upper Limit

[Aperu des fonctions]

Dfinissez la limite suprieure de couple pour estimer si le travail est OK ou NOK. Assurez-vous quil est dans la plage, Torque Upper Limit Shut-Off Torque Torque Lower Limit.

[Valeur par dfaut]

*999.9 Nm/*8848.7 In.lbs/*737.4 Ft.lbs

[Valeur de rglage]

EYFMH1 : 10.0 Nm *999.9 Nm/88.5 In.lbs *8848.7 In.lbs/7.4 Ft.lbs *737.4 Ft.lbs EYFMH2 : 30.0 Nm *999.9 Nm/265.5 In.lbs *8848.7 In.lbs/22.1 Ft.lbs *737.4 Ft.lbs Saisir la valeur avec un astrisque (*) a pour effet de dsactiver la fonction.

- 177 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 280 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 280 2023/11/28 14:24:04 2023/11/28 14:24:04 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.9 LISTE DES PARAMTRES Torque Lower Limit

[Aperu des fonctions]

Dfinissez la limite infrieure de couple pour estimer si le travail est OK ou NOK. Assurez-vous quil est dans la plage, Torque Upper Limit Shut-Off Torque Torque Lower Limit.

[Valeur par dfaut]

*0 Nm/*0 In.lbs/*0 Ft.lbs

[Valeur de rglage]

EYFMH1 : *0 Nm 70.0 Nm/*0 In.lbs 619.5 In.lbs/*0 Ft.lbs 51.6 Ft.lbs EYFMH2 : *0 Nm 140.0 Nm/*0 In.lbs 1238.9 In.lbs/*0 Ft.lbs 103.2 Ft.lbs Offset_Slope

[Aperu des fonctions]

Ce coefficient permet dajuster linclinaison de la courbe de couple de puissance de loutil suivant la courbe de couple sur la pice dusinage simule. Pour le rglage, il est recommand dutiliser la fonction de calcul de dcalage automatique.

(Comment rgler, Se reporter 2.2.8 ).

[Valeur par dfaut]

EYFMH1 : 25.00 EYFMH2 : 55.00

[Valeur de rglage]

0.10 500.00 Offset_Intercept

[Aperu des fonctions]

Ce coefficient permet dajuster linterception de la courbe de couple de puissance de loutil suivant la courbe de couple sur la pice dusinage simule. Pour le rglage, il est recommand dutiliser la fonction de calcul de dcalage automatique.

(Comment rgler, Se reporter 2.2.8 ). Remarque La valeur de dcalage (interception) est la limite infrieure que le capteur de couple peut mesurer avec prcision. Assurez-vous que la valeur dfinie de Shut-Off Torque et/ou Torque Lower Limit nest pas infrieure la valeur de dcalage (interception).

[Valeur par dfaut]

EYFMH1 : 5.00 EYFMH2 : 25.00

[Valeur de rglage]

-1000.00 1000.00 Saisir la valeur avec un astrisque (*) a pour effet de dsactiver la fonction.

- 178 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 281 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 281 2023/11/28 14:24:04 2023/11/28 14:24:04 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.9 LISTE DES PARAMTRES Angle Before Snug Upper Limit

[Aperu des fonctions]

Dfinissez la limite suprieure de langle accumul, depuis le dclenchement jusquau point dajustement, pour estimer si le travail est OK ou NOK. La mthode de dtection du point dajustement peut tre slectionne depuis le rglage du point dajustement.

[Valeur par dfaut]

*99999

[Valeur de rglage]

0 *99999 Angle Before Snug Lower Limit

[Aperu des fonctions]

Dfinissez la limite infrieure de langle accumul, depuis le dclenchement jusquau point dajustement, pour estimer si le travail est OK ou NOK. La mthode de dtection du point dajustement peut tre slectionne depuis le rglage du point dajustement.

[Valeur par dfaut]

*0

[Valeur de rglage]

*0 99999 Angle After Snug Upper Limit

[Aperu des fonctions]

Dfinissez la limite suprieure de langle accumul, depuis le dclenchement jusqu larrt du fonctionnement, pour estimer si le travail est OK ou NOK. La mthode de dtection du point dajustement peut tre slectionne depuis le rglage du point dajustement.

[Valeur par dfaut]

*9999

[Valeur de rglage]

0 *9999 Angle After Snug Lower Limit

[Aperu des fonctions]

Dfinissez la limite infrieure de langle accumul, depuis le point dajustement jusqu larrt du fonctionnement, pour estimer si le travail est OK ou NOK. La mthode de dtection du point dajustement peut tre slectionne depuis le rglage du point dajustement.

[Valeur par dfaut]

*0

[Valeur de rglage]

*0 9999 Saisir la valeur avec un astrisque (*) a pour effet de dsactiver la fonction.

- 179 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 282 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 282 2023/11/28 14:24:04 2023/11/28 14:24:04 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.9 LISTE DES PARAMTRES Angle Error Shut-Off

[Aperu des fonctions]

Avec cette fonction ON (Marche), si langle de limite suprieure dfini est dpass durant le travail de serrage, loutil cesse de fonctionner automatiquement. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez dfinir langle de limite suprieure.

[Valeur par dfaut]

OFF (Arrt)

[Valeur de rglage]

ON (Marche), OFF (Arrt) No Load Speed

[Aperu des fonctions]

Rglez la vitesse de rotation de lenclume depuis le dclenchement jusquau dbut des pulsations de loutil par phases de 100 rpm.

[Valeur par dfaut]

2300 rpm

[Valeur de rglage]

1500 rpm 2300 rpm Variable Speed Control

[Aperu des fonctions]

Lorsque cette fonction est sur ON (Marche), la vitesse sans charge change en fonction de la profondeur de traction de dclenchement. Si cette fonction est sur OFF (Arrt), la vitesse sans charge sera fixe au rgime tr/min dfini.

[Valeur par dfaut]

OFF (Arrt)

[Valeur de rglage]

ON (Marche), OFF (Arrt) Storage Option When Limit Reached

[Aperu fonctionnel]

Cette option vous permet de choisir sil faut mettre automatiquement jour les journaux de lhistorique ou interdire le fonctionnement de loutil lorsque lespace de stockage du journal de lhistorique dans loutil a atteint la limite.

[Valeur par dfaut]

Auto Delete

[Valeur de rglage]

Auto Delete, Fastening Prohibited Saisir la valeur avec un astrisque (*) a pour effet de dsactiver la fonction.

- 180 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 283 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 283 2023/11/28 14:24:04 2023/11/28 14:24:04 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.9 LISTE DES PARAMTRES Snug Point

[Aperu des fonctions]

Slectionnez une mthode de dtection pour le point dajustement. Le point dajustement est utilis comme point de rfrence pour diviser les rsultats dangle dans langle avant lajustement et dans langle aprs lajustement. When Pulsing Starts :

Snug Torque :

Select From Graph :

Le moment o loutil a commenc mettre des pulsations est appel le point dajustement. Le moment o le serrage a atteint le couple dfini est appel un point dajustement. Slectionnez un point dajustement souhait partir des donnes de forme donde de couple.

[Valeur par dfaut]

When Pulsing Starts

[Valeur de rglage]

When Pulsing Starts, Snug Torque, Select From Graph Detection Threshold (Snug Torque)

[Aperu des fonctions]

Le moment o le couple de serrage a atteint ce seuil est considr comme le point dajustement. Ce paramtre est activ seulement lorsque le rglage du point dajustement est Snug Torque . Remarque La dtection du point dajustement par Snug Torque peut tre moins prcise si la valeur absolue de Offset_Intercept est leve.

[Valeur par dfaut]

0.0 Nm

[Valeur de rglage]

0.0 Nm 999.9 Nm / 0.0 In.lbs 8848.7 In.lbs / 0.0 Ft.lbs 737.4 Ft.lbs Detection Threshold (Select From Graph)

[Aperu des fonctions]

Le moment o le couple de serrage pour un angle de serrage de 1 a atteint au moins ce seuil est considr comme le point dajustement. La valeur est automatiquement dfinie en slectionnant une section sur le graphique. Ce paramtre est activ seulement lorsque le rglage du point dajustement est Select From Graph . Remarque Si ce seuil est dfini trop haut, la dtection du point dajustement peut ne pas se faire suivant le travail.

[Valeur par dfaut]

0.0 Nm/1

[Valeur de rglage]

0.0 Nm/1 999.9 Nm/1 / 0.0 In.lbs/1 8848.7 In.lbs/1 / 0.0 Ft.lbs/1 737.4 Ft.lbs/1 Saisir la valeur avec un astrisque (*) a pour effet de dsactiver la fonction.

- 181 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 284 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 284 2023/11/28 14:24:04 2023/11/28 14:24:04 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.9 LISTE DES PARAMTRES Detection Start Angle (Select From Graph)

[Aperu des fonctions]

Sauf si langle de serrage cumul atteint cette valeur, la dtection du point dajustement ne dmarre pas. Ce paramtre est activ seulement lorsque le rglage du point dajustement est Select From Graph .

[Valeur par dfaut]

0

[Valeur de rglage]

0 99999 Snug Point Detection Level

[Aperu des fonctions]

Ce paramtre modifie le niveau de charge pour la dtection des points de prserrage des boulons. Laugmentation du snug point detection level (Niveau de dtection du point de prserrage) peut empcher loutil de sarrter avant quun boulon natteigne le point de prserrage suite une charge leve pendant le serrage.

(Selon le travail, mme si le snug point detection level (Niveau de dtection du point de prserrage) est augment, loutil peut sarrter avant le point de prserrage.)

[Valeur par dfaut]

*0

[Valeur de rglage]

*0 7 Disable Reverse

[Aperu des fonctions]

Lorsque cette fonction est sur ON (Marche), loutil ne fonctionnera pas en sens inverse mme si la gchette est actionne.

[Valeur par dfaut]

OFF (Arrt)

[Valeur de rglage]

ON (Marche), OFF (Arrt) Saisir la valeur avec un astrisque (*) a pour effet de dsactiver la fonction.

- 182 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 285 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 285 2023/11/28 14:24:04 2023/11/28 14:24:04 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.9 LISTE DES PARAMTRES Rundown Error Detection

[Aperu des fonctions]

Si loutil sarrte avant lexpiration du temps dfini depuis le dbut du travail, cela sera considr comme NOK.

[Valeur par dfaut]

*0.0 s

[Valeur de rglage]

*0.0 s 3.0 s Retightening Prevention

[Aperu des fonctions]

Sauf si le temps slectionn sest coul depuis que le travail est termin, loutil ne fonctionnera pas mme si la gchette est actionne.

[Valeur par dfaut]

*0.0 s

[Valeur de rglage]

*0.0 s 3.0 s Cross Thread Reduction

[Aperu des fonctions]

Cette option de fonctionnement de loutil permet de rduire les dformations de filets. Fonction de rduction de dformation de filet dsactive. OFF :

Soft Start Up Shift Timing : La vitesse sans charge est fixe aux rpm les plus bas de loutil avant lexpiration du temps dfini depuis le dbut du travail. rpm les plus bas de loutil: 350 rpm Afin de suivre un filet, loutil fonctionne en sens inverse 360 degrs avant de fonctionner vers lavant. 360 degree Reverse :

[Valeur par dfaut]

OFF (Soft Start Up Shift Timing *0.0 s)

[Valeur de rglage]

OFF, Soft Start Up Shift Timing (*0.0 1.0 s), 360 degree Reverse Saisir la valeur avec un astrisque (*) a pour effet de dsactiver la fonction.

- 183 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 286 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 286 2023/11/28 14:24:04 2023/11/28 14:24:04 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.9 LISTE DES PARAMTRES Ignore Rundown Result Before Snug

[Aperu des fonctions]

Lorsque cette fonction est sur ON (Marche), si le travail est interrompu par une dsactivation de la gchette avant le point dajustement, le journal dhistorique pour cela ne sera pas enregistr. partir du paramtre Snug Point , dfinissez la mthode pour dterminer le point dajustement.

[Valeur par dfaut]

OFF (Arrt)

[Valeur de rglage]

ON (Marche), OFF (Arrt) Snug Torque Detection Delay

[Aperu des fonctions]

Loutil ne sarrte pas mme si une charge est gnre en cours qui excde le couple darrt dfini avant lexpiration du temps dfini depuis le dbut du travail.

[Valeur par dfaut]

*0.0 s

[Valeur de rglage]

*0.0 s 3.0 s Buzzer

[Aperu des fonctions]

Cette option permet dmettre un signal sonore lorsque le travail est termin. OFF :

Buzzer OK :

Un signal sonore nest pas mis lorsque le travail est termin. Lorsque le travail est termin, un signal sonore est mis lorsque le rsultat est OK. Buzzer NOK : Lorsque le travail est termin, un signal sonore est mis lorsque le rsultat est NOK.

[Valeur par dfaut]

OFF

[Valeur de rglage]

OFF, Buzzer OK, Buzzer NOK Saisir la valeur avec un astrisque (*) a pour effet de dsactiver la fonction.

- 184 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 287 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 287 2023/11/28 14:24:04 2023/11/28 14:24:04 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.9 LISTE DES PARAMTRES Diagramme schmatique des paramtres lis au couple, langle et la vitesse. La charge est ignore et il ny pas darrt Snug Torque Detection Delay Torque Upper Limit Shut-Off Torque Torque Lower Limit Courbe de couple Snug Torque Activer Angle Before Snug Angle After Snug Angle Before Snug Lower Limit Angle Before Snug Upper Limit Angle After Snug Lower Limit Angle After Snug Upper Limit No Load Speed (1500 2300 rpm) Variable Speed Control (ON, OFF) Soft Start (ON rpm les plus bas de loutil, OFF) rpm les plus bas de loutil: 350 rpm

- 185 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 288 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 288 2023/11/28 14:24:04 2023/11/28 14:24:04 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.10 OPTIONS DE RGLAGE DE LOUTIL Vous pouvez dfinir les options doutil suivantes partir du logiciel Tool Manager. Tool Information (Serial) Maintenance Interval Alarm (Pulse Time) Clock 1 Ouvrez la fentre dinformations de loutil. Slectionnez loutil () connect dans la liste doutils ou licne de configuration du dispositif (), et cliquez sur [Tool Info]. 2 Configurez Tool Information. Vous pouvez configurer Tool Information (numro de srie) dans la fentre dinformations de loutil. 1. Entrez un numro de srie huit chiffres dans le champ de saisie du numro de srie ().

(Le numro de srie est imprim sur la plaque de couleur de loutil.) 2. Lorsque vous slectionnez [Set Serial Number] (), les informations de loutil nouvellement dfinies seront enregistres dans loutil. Plaque de couleur Remarque En vrifiant [Change] dans llment de [Model], vous pourrez changer les informations de numro de modle de loutil enregistres dans loutil connect. Cette fonction est utilise seulement lorsquun numro de modle incorrect est enregistr dans loutil cause du remplacement des composants de circuit ou dautres raisons. MISE EN GARDE Loutil peut ne pas dlivrer sa performance relle, si vous enregistrez un numro de modle diffrent de celui indiqu sur ltiquette nominale de loutil.

- 186 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 289 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 289 2023/11/28 14:24:04 2023/11/28 14:24:04 FR

2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.10 OPTIONS DE RGLAGE DE LOUTIL 3 Dfinissez Maintenance Interval Alarm (Pulse Time). La valeur Maintenance Interval Alarm (Pulse Time) peut tre dfinie dans la fentre dinformations de loutil. Maintenance Interval Alarm (Pulse Time)

[Aperu des fonctions]

Cette alarme fait le dcompte du temps de pulsations qui a t cumul depuis le dbut de lutilisation de loutil et vous rappelle la priode dentretien. Lorsquil y a une heure ou moins avant la priode dfinie, laffichage du panneau de commande vous envoie un avertissement. Si le temps dfini est atteint, laffichage du panneau de commande vous donne un rappel et le moteur de loutil sera verrouill (arrt). Linitialisation de loutil permet de rinitialiser le temps de pulsations cumul et aussi de dverrouiller le moteur de loutil. MISE EN GARDE Lorsque loutil est initialis, les autres paramtres reviennent aux valeurs par dfaut dusine. Si vous initialisez loutil, veillez reconfigurer les paramtres avant de lutiliser de nouveau. Affichage davertissement (change toutes les 0,5 secondes) :

Valeur de rglage (1 99) -1 Mode de fonctionnement (A ou C) Affichage darrt (change toutes les 0,5 secondes) :

Valeur de rglage (1 99) 0

[Valeur par dfaut]

*0 heure

[Valeur de rglage]

*0 heure 99 heures Saisir la valeur avec un astrisque (*) a pour effet de dsactiver la fonction. 1. 2. Entrez le temps ncessaire pour mettre une alarme dans le champ de saisie () de [Maintenance Interval Alarm (Pulse Time)]. Lorsque vous slectionnez [Set Interval Alarm] (), lalarme sera rgle dans loutil.

- 187 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 290 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 290 2023/11/28 14:24:05 2023/11/28 14:24:05 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.10 OPTIONS DE RGLAGE DE LOUTIL 4 Rglez Clock. Lhorloge interne de loutil peut tre rgle dans la fentre dinformations de loutil. Lorsque vous cliquez sur [Adjust to PC Clock] (), lhorloge interne de loutil sera synchronise avec lhorloge de votre PC.

- 188 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 291 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 291 2023/11/28 14:24:05 2023/11/28 14:24:05 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.11 INITIALISATION DE LA CONFIGURATION DE LOUTIL Vous pouvez initialiser loutil partir du logiciel Tool Manager. Pour loutil initialis, tous les paramtres configurs reviennent leurs valeurs dusine par dfaut. De plus, le compte cumul du temps de pulsation de Maintenance Interval Alarm (Pulse Time) est remis 0. 1 Dans la liste doutils (), slectionnez un outil initialiser. Loutil initialiser doit tre connect au logiciel Tool Manager. 2 Slectionnez [Read From Connected Tool] () dans la liste de paramtres. 3 Slectionnez [...] () dans lcran de saisie des paramtres configurs et cliquez sur [Factory Default]. Lorsquun fichier de paramtres autre que celui de loutil connect est slectionn,

[Delete] et non pas [Factory Default] est affich. 4 Lorsque la bote de dialogue saffiche pour demander sil faut initialiser loutil, slectionnez [OK], et il sera initialis.

- 189 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 292 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 292 2023/11/28 14:24:05 2023/11/28 14:24:05 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.12 AFFICHAGE ET ENREGISTREMENT DU JOURNAL DE LHISTORIQUE Vous pouvez enregistrer les journaux dhistorique dans loutil dans le logiciel Tool Manager et les consulter plus tard. Enregistrez les journaux dhistorique enregistrs dans loutil dans le logiciel Tool Manager Il est possible de lire un journal dhistorique de loutil connect au logiciel Tool Manager via une communication USB, et de lenregistrer dans la liste dhistorique. 1 Dans la liste doutils (), slectionnez un outil connecter. 2 Slectionnez un journal dhistorique sur longlet de changement daffichage (), et cliquez sur [Read From Connected Tool] (). 3 Il sera lu lorsque vous slectionnez [Acquire] dans la bote de dialogue afficher. Le journal dhistorique de lecture est enregistr automatiquement dans le logiciel Tool Manager. 4 Dans la bote de dialogue affiche aprs la fin de la lecture, vous pouvez choisir de supprimer le journal dhistorique de lecture dans la mmoire interne de loutil ou de le conserver. 5 Le journal dhistorique de lecture est ajout dans la liste dhistorique (). Remarque Vous pouvez dfinir un paramtre pour choisir dcraser les anciens journaux dhistorique ou dinterdire la fixation lorsque la capacit des journaux dhistorique enregistrs dans loutil a atteint la limite suprieure du stockage de loutil. Lisez priodiquement les donnes.

- 190 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 293 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 293 2023/11/28 14:24:05 2023/11/28 14:24:05 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.12 AFFICHAGE ET ENREGISTREMENT DU JOURNAL DE LHISTORIQUE Consultez les journaux dhistorique enregistrs dans le logiciel Tool Manager Les journaux dhistorique enregistrs dans le logiciel Tool Manager sont affichs dans la liste dhistorique (). Lorsque vous slectionnez un journal dhistorique souhait, son contenu sera affich sur lcran daffichage de lhistorique () droite. Pour consulter le journal dhistorique acquis dans le rglage de dcalage, slectionnez

[Offset] () dans la liste dhistorique. (Pour savoir comment rgler les dcalages, Se reporter 2.2.8 .) Pour les lments [Work Result], [Torque Result], [Angle (Before Snug)], et [Angle (After Snug)], laffichage sera mis en surbrillance en vert lorsquil ny a pas de problme, ou en rouge sil y a un problme. Faire un commentaire supplmentaire dans le fichier du journal dhistorique Vous pouvez faire un commentaire supplmentaire dans le fichier du journal dhistorique en effectuant la procdure suivante. 1 Slectionnez un fichier de journal dhistorique souhait (), et cliquez sur [Comment] (). 2 Lorsque le champ de commentaire () est activ, entrez un commentaire souhait et appuyez sur la touche Enter. Le commentaire supplmentaire peut comprendre jusqu 25 caractres un bit ou 15 caractres deux bits.

- 191 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 294 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 294 2023/11/28 14:24:05 2023/11/28 14:24:05 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.12 AFFICHAGE ET ENREGISTREMENT DU JOURNAL DE LHISTORIQUE Exporter les fichiers de journal dhistorique Dans le menu affich en survolant avec le curseur de la souris sur [Export], vous pouvez slectionner lun des formats suivants et exporter les journaux dhistorique. CSV format: Le format de fichier pour la consultation et ldition ZDT format: Le format de fichier pour installer le logiciel Tool Manager dans les donnes du journal dhistorique dimportation de lautre dispositif Importer le journal dhistorique (en ZDT format) Export depuis lautre dispositif Le logiciel Tool Manager peut importer le journal dhistorique export au ZDT format. 1 Slectionnez [Import History File] () dans la liste dhistorique. 2 Slectionnez un fichier ZDT contenant un fichier de journal dhistorique parcourir, dans la bote de dialogue Ouvrir un fichier afficher. 3 Le fichier du journal dhistorique dans le fichier ZDT est nouvellement ajout dans la liste dhistorique (). Lorsque vous slectionnez un fichier, son contenu sera affich sur la fentre daffichage () droite.

- 192 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 295 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 295 2023/11/28 14:24:06 2023/11/28 14:24:06 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.12 AFFICHAGE ET ENREGISTREMENT DU JOURNAL DE LHISTORIQUE Vous pouvez consulter les donnes de graphique enregistres dans le logiciel Tool Manager Les donnes graphiques dune tche effectue sont enregistres dans loutil. Aprs la tche, vous pouvez visualiser les donnes partir du logiciel Tool Manager. Remarque Le logiciel Tool Manager calcule une forme donde de couple partir des informations de tension du capteur de couple, indpendamment de lalgorithme darrt de loutil. Par consquent, les valeurs de couple peuvent tre affiches diffremment de celles de lestimation darrt de loutil. Utilisez-les comme informations de rfrence qui montrent comment le couple mesur a tendance changer.

m N

l e p u o C Temps [s]

- 193 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 296 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 296 2023/11/28 14:24:06 2023/11/28 14:24:06 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.12 AFFICHAGE ET ENREGISTREMENT DU JOURNAL DE LHISTORIQUE En double-cliquant sur la ligne dun journal dhistorique affich sur lcran daffichage de lhistorique, la fentre dtaille de lhistorique souvre et les donnes de graphique de ce journal dhistorique saffichent. Double-clic Le graphique afficher peut tre chang en utilisant les boutons [<] [>] et le menu droulant () au-dessus de la fentre. Changez les dossiers de journal dhistorique de loutil slectionn en utilisant [<] et [>], et slectionnez un journal dhistorique pour afficher le graphique partir du menu droulant. En slectionnant les menus droulants () sous le graphique, vous pouvez dfinir le couple de serrage, langle de serrage ou la vitesse sous forme daxe vertical du graphique et dfinir le temps de travail de serrage dfini, langle de serrage ou le nombre dimpulsions sous forme daxe horizontal. En slectionnant un menu droulant () sous le graphique, vous pouvez changer lchelle du graphique. La fentre de donnes () droite affiche les donnes de journal pour chaque chantillon (toutes les 20 ms pour une fixation sans charge et toutes les impulsions lors de la pulsation) dans une tche de serrage. Vous pouvez agrandir la fentre en glissant lextrmit de la fentre dtaille de lhistorique.

- 194 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 297 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 297 2023/11/28 14:24:06 2023/11/28 14:24:06 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.12 AFFICHAGE ET ENREGISTREMENT DU JOURNAL DE LHISTORIQUE Effectuer un rglage de loutil tout en parcourant les donnes de graphique Lorsque vous slectionnez [Tool Settings] () au-dessus de la fentre, la fentre de rglage souvre. Certains paramtres peuvent tre configurs dans la fentre de rglage.

(Pour savoir comment configurer chaque paramtre, Se reporter 2.2.8 .) Pour configurer les paramtres qui ne sont pas affichs dans la fentre de rglage, cliquez sur [Parameters] () pour aller longlet Paramtres. Lorsque vous cliquez sur [Write to Tool] (), le fichier de paramtres dfini sera enregistr dans loutil slectionn dans la liste doutils ().

(Les paramtres qui nont pas t configurs dans cette fentre de rglage resteront dans leur tat initial, sans tre changs.)

- 195 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 298 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 298 2023/11/28 14:24:07 2023/11/28 14:24:07 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.12 AFFICHAGE ET ENREGISTREMENT DU JOURNAL DE LHISTORIQUE Exporter les donnes de graphique Lorsque vous appuyez sur [Export], les donnes de graphique slectionnes seront exportes au format de fichier CSV.

- 196 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 299 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 299 2023/11/28 14:24:07 2023/11/28 14:24:07 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.13 LISTE DES LMENTS DU JOURNAL DE LHISTORIQUE Count

[Affichage de laperu]

Le dcompte se fait dans lordre dexcution du travail. Le dcompte sera remis zro lorsque vous importez les journaux dhistorique depuis loutil au logiciel Tool Manager et lorsque vous supprimez les journaux dhistorique de la mmoire de loutil. Date

[Affichage de laperu]

Ceci affiche la date de fin du travail. Time

[Affichage de laperu]

Ceci affiche lheure de fin du travail. Work Result

[Affichage de laperu]

Le rsultat du travail est jug OK ou NOK. Les critres destimation OK/NOK sont les suivants. OK : Un arrt a t excut avec succs sans erreur, NOK : Un arrt a t excut de manire incomplte ou comporte une erreur NOK Message

[Affichage de laperu]

Lorsque le rsultat du travail est NOK, la raison de NOK est affiche dans la catgorie Couple, Angle ou Erreur. Si la raison de NOK est classifie comme Erreur, les dtails seront affichs dans le message derreur sur la dernire ligne du journal dhistorique. Shut-off Torque

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de couple qui entrane larrt de loutil. Upper Torque Limit

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de la limite suprieure de couple pour estimer que le rsultat du travail est OK. Lower Torque Limit

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de la limite infrieure de couple pour estimer que le rsultat du travail est OK.

- 197 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 300 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 300 2023/11/28 14:24:07 2023/11/28 14:24:07 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.13 LISTE DES LMENTS DU JOURNAL DE LHISTORIQUE Torque Result

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre la valeur de rsultat de couple de puissance de loutil pour le travail en question. Upper Angle Limit (Before Snug)

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de la limite suprieure dangle avant lajustement pour estimer que le rsultat du travail est OK. Langle avant lajustement est un angle de rotation denclume depuis lactivation de la gchette au point dajustement dfini par le paramtre du point dajustement. Lower Angle Limit (Before Snug)

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de la limite infrieure dangle avant lajustement pour estimer que le rsultat du travail est OK. Langle avant lajustement est un angle de rotation denclume depuis lactivation de la gchette au point dajustement dfini par le paramtre du point dajustement. Angle (Before Snug)

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre la valeur de rsultat de langle avant lajustement du travail en question. Langle avant lajustement est un angle de rotation denclume depuis lactivation de la gchette au point dajustement dfini par le paramtre du point dajustement. Upper Angle Limit (After Snug)

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de la limite suprieure dangle aprs lajustement pour estimer que le rsultat du travail est OK. Langle aprs lajustement est un angle de rotation denclume depuis le point dajustement dfini par le paramtre de point dajustement jusqu la fin du travail. Lower Angle Limit (After Snug)

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de la limite infrieure dange aprs lajustement pour estimer que le rsultat du travail est OK. Langle aprs lajustement est un angle de rotation denclume depuis le point dajustement dfini par le paramtre de point dajustement jusqu la fin du travail.

- 198 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 301 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 301 2023/11/28 14:24:07 2023/11/28 14:24:07 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.13 LISTE DES LMENTS DU JOURNAL DE LHISTORIQUE Angle (After Snug)

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre la valeur de rsultat de langle aprs lajustement du travail en question. Langle aprs lajustement est un angle de rotation denclume depuis le point dajustement dfini par le paramtre de point dajustement jusqu la fin du travail. Number of Pulse

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le nombre dimpulsions mises par loutil pour le travail en question. Fastening Time

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le temps ncessaire depuis lactivation de la gchette jusqu la fin du travail concern. Battery Level

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le niveau de batterie restant lorsque le travail en question a dmarr dans les quatre niveaux : 3 0. Le niveau de batterie restant indiqu sur chaque affichage est le suivant. 3 : Niveau de charge pleine niveau de batterie restant adquat, 2 : 40% ou moins, 1 : 20% ou moins, 0 : Batterie dcharge. Offset Slope

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur du coefficient pour convertir la tension de sortie du capteur de couple en couple. Offset Intercept

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur du coefficient pour convertir la tension de sortie du capteur de couple en couple. Snug Point Detection Method

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de [Snug Point Detection Method]. Snug Point Detection Threshold

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de seuil pour dterminer le point dajustement. Le [Snug Point Detection Threshold] est affich lorsque le paramtre configur de [Snug Point] est [Snug Torque] ou [Select From Graph].

- 199 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 302 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 302 2023/11/28 14:24:07 2023/11/28 14:24:07 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.13 LISTE DES LMENTS DU JOURNAL DE LHISTORIQUE Snug Point Detection Start Angle

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de langle pour dmarrer la dtection du point dajustement. Le [Snug Point Detection Start Angle] est affich lorsque le paramtre configur de

[Snug Point] est [Select From Graph]. Angle Error Shut-Off

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de la fonction pour arrter loutil lorsque la limite suprieure dangle est excde. No Load Speed

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de la vitesse sans charge. Disable Reverse

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de la fonction de dsactivation du travail en sens inverse. Rundown Error Detection

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de la fonction destimation du travail sur NOK lors de larrt de loutil durant le temps dfini aprs lactivation de la gchette. Retightening Prevention

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de la fonction de dsactivation du fonctionnement de loutil jusqu lexpiration du temps dfini depuis lactivation de la gchette. Cross Thread Reduction

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de loption de fonctionnement pour rduire la dformation de filet. Soft Start Up Shift Timing

[Affichage de laperu]

Lorsque la fonction de rduction de dformation de filet est dfinie pour un dmarrage progressif, le temps dfini est affich.

- 200 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 303 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 303 2023/11/28 14:24:07 2023/11/28 14:24:07 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.13 LISTE DES LMENTS DU JOURNAL DE LHISTORIQUE Snug Torque Detection Delay

[Affichage de laperu]

Cela montre le paramtre configur de la fonction pour que loutil ignore la charge de travail au milieu dun serrage avant lexpiration du temps dfini depuis lactivation de la gchette. Error Message

[Affichage de laperu]

Lorsque la raison de NOK, le rsultat de travail affich dans le message NOK est classifi comme Erreur, les dtails de lerreur sont affichs.

(Pour les dtails des messages derreur, Se reporter 4.3.1 .)

- 201 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 304 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 304 2023/11/28 14:24:07 2023/11/28 14:24:07 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.14 GESTION DU DOSSIER DE DONNES Vous pouvez grer les dossiers de donnes partir de [File] dans le logiciel Tool Manager. Une gestion des dossiers de donnes est effectue en slectionnant un dossier souhait dans la bote de dialogue de slection de dossier. Bote de dialogue de slection de dossier Setting Data Folder Vous pouvez spcifier le dossier dans lequel enregistrer les donnes des journaux dhistorique et les paramtres configurs. Slectionnez un dossier de destination dans la bote de dialogue de slection de dossier. Lorsque vous slectionnez un dossier, de nouveaux dossiers seront crs sous le nom de [History] et [Parameter] dans le dossier slectionn. Data Backup Vous pouvez effectuer une sauvegarde des journaux dhistorique et des paramtres configurs. Slectionnez un dossier dans lequel enregistrer la sauvegarde, dans la bote de dialogue de slection de dossier. Lorsque vous slectionnez un dossier, un nouveau dossier de sauvegarde, dont le nom affiche la date et lheure de cration, sera cr dans le dossier slectionn.

(Exemple : Nom de dossier 20230415103045 = Cr 10:30:45 le 15 avril 2023) MISE EN GARDE Ne changez pas le nom du dossier de sauvegarde. Si le nom de dossier est chang, les donnes de sauvegarde ne peuvent pas tre restaures. Data Restore Les donnes des journaux dhistorique et les paramtres configurs enregistrs comme sauvegarde peuvent tre imports dans le logiciel Tool Manager et restaurs. Slectionnez un dossier de sauvegarde dans lequel restaurer la sauvegarde, dans la bote de dialogue de slection de dossier. Les donnes du dossier de sauvegarde seront importes dans le logiciel Tool Manager. Remarque Les mmes donnes que celles qui se trouvent dj dans le logiciel Tool Manager ne seront pas crases.

- 202 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 305 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 305 2023/11/28 14:24:07 2023/11/28 14:24:07 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.15 CONFIGURATION DE LAFFICHAGE DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER Divers rglages daffichage du logiciel peuvent tre effectus partir de [Option] du logiciel Tool Manager. Slectionnez [Option] pour ouvrir la bote de dialogue doptions. Basic Settings Vous pouvez slectionner Langue , Unit , Onglet par dfaut et Sparateur CSV . Pour les langues, langlais ou le japonais peuvent tre slectionns. Pour une unit de couple, Nm, In.lbs ou Ft.lbs peut tre slectionn. Pour longlet par dfaut, [Parameter] ou [History] peut tre slectionn. Vous pouvez choisir [Virgule] ou [Point-virgule] pour le sparateur au format de fichier CSV pour lentre et la sortie dans le fichier de paramtres et le fichier de journal de lhistorique. History Vous pouvez afficher ou masquer chacun des lments des journaux dhistorique. Les lments portant une coche (

) dans leur case sont affichs dans le logiciel Tool Manager. Les donnes du journal dhistorique des lments masqus ne seront pas supprimes. Lorsque vous [Acquire] (acqurez) des journaux dhistorique de loutil, les donnes des lments masqus seront enregistres dans le dossier spcifi. Parameter Vous pouvez afficher ou masquer chacun des lments des paramtres configurs. Les lments portant une coche (

) dans leur case sont affichs dans le logiciel Tool Manager. Lorsque vous [Apply] (appliquez) les paramtres configurs loutil, les valeurs par dfaut ou mme les valeurs dfinies prcdemment des lments masqus seront enregistres dans loutil.

- 203 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 306 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 306 2023/11/28 14:24:07 2023/11/28 14:24:07 FR 2.2 UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER 2.2.16 FONCTION DAIDE Vous pouvez consulter les diverses sections des informations daide de [Help] du logiciel Tool Manager. Compatible Tools Vous pouvez vrifier le numro de modle de loutil qui peut tre actionn depuis le logiciel Tool Manager. Software Version Vous pouvez vrifier les informations de version du logiciel utilis.

- 204 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 307 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 307 2023/11/28 14:24:07 2023/11/28 14:24:07 FR 3.1 CAPACIT ET CARACTRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES DE LOUTIL Capacit de loutil Modle n EYFMH1WC EYFMH1WP EYFMH2WC EYFMH2WP Travail recommand

(rsistance des boulons) M8 (boulon haute rsistance) M10 (boulon ordinaire) M10 (boulon haute rsistance) M12 (boulon ordinaire haute rsistance) M14 (boulon ordinaire) Environ 50.0 Nm 120.0 Nm

/ 442.5 In.lbs 1061.9 In.lbs

/ 36.9 Ft.lbs 88.5 Ft.lbs

< Domaine recommand pour Plage de fonctionnement de contrle de couple Charge de travail et vitesse de travail (avec un pack compltement charg) Environ 20.0 Nm 60.0 Nm

/ 177.0 In.lbs 531.0 In.lbs

/ 14.7 Ft.lbs 44.2 Ft.lbs lassemblage de grands composants>

50.0 Nm 80.0 Nm

/442.5 In.lbs 708.0 In.lbs

/36.9 Ft.lbs 59.0 Ft.lbs

<M8: 23 Nm / 204 In.lbs / 17 Ft.lbs>

940 boulons : Environ 0,5 s/boulon

(EYFB43) 490 boulons : Environ 0,5 s/boulon

(EYFB41)

<M10: 43 Nm / 381 In.lbs / 32 Ft.lbs>

670 boulons : Environ 0,7 s/boulon

(EYFB43) 350 boulons : Environ 0,7 s/boulon

(EYFB41)

<M12: 71 Nm / 628 In.lbs / 52 Ft.lbs>

450 boulons : Environ 0,9 s/boulon

(EYFB43) 230 boulons : Environ 0,9 s/boulon

(EYFB41)

- 205 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 308 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 308 2023/11/28 14:24:07 2023/11/28 14:24:07 FR

3.1 CAPACIT ET CARACTRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES DE LOUTIL Caractristiques techniques de loutil Modle n Taille de la cl Tension du moteur Vitesse sans charge EYFMH1WC EYFMH1WP EYFMH2WC EYFMH2WP 12,7 mm 14,4 V CC 0 environ 2300 rotations/minute

(La vitesse maximum peut tre dfinie entre environ 1500 et 2300 rotations/minute.) Nombre dimpulsions 0 environ 2700 rotations/minute 0 environ 2600 rotations/minute Longueur totale Dimensions Hauteur totale Environ 215 mm EYFB41 utilis : Environ 246 mm EYFB43 utilis : Environ 264 mm Largeur totale Environ 61 mm

(Largeur maximum de batterie autonome : environ 75 mm) Masse (poids) Norme de communication sans fil EYFB41 utilis : Environ 1,8 kg EYFB43 utilis : Environ 2,05 kg LAN sans fil (IEEE802.11a/b/g/n) n: HT20 uniquement Bande de frquence 2,412-2,462 GHz / 5,180-5,240 GHz Nombre de canaux 2,4 GHz : 1 11 canaux / 5 GHz : 36, 40, 44, 48 canaux Caractristiques techniques du connecteur USB Nombre de journaux dhistorique de loutil qui peuvent tre enregistrs (en mode [Stand Alone Mode]) Nombre de paramtres de loutil qui peuvent tre enregistrs (en mode [Stand Alone Mode]) Temps de charge (lorsque le chargeur de batterie EY0L82B est utilis) 1 USB Type-C Environ 45000 boulons ( une cadence de 1,2 s) 1 paramtre EYFB41; Charge pour utilisation pratique : 35 minutes, Pleine charge : 40 minutes EYFB43; Charge pour utilisation pratique : 45 minutes, Pleine charge : 60 minutes 1 USB Type-C est une marque dpose de USB Implementers Forum.

- 206 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 309 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 309 2023/11/28 14:24:07 2023/11/28 14:24:07 FR 3.2 SPCIFICATIONS DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER Tool Manager (Modle n : EYFSW102) Systme dexploitation compatible Windows10 Home, Windows10 Pro, Windows10 Enterprise

(32 bits/64 bits) version anglaise, version japonaise Langues supportes Capacit de disque dur recommande 10 Mo ou plus (donnes de journal exclues) Anglais, japonais Interface de communication USB 2.0 ou suprieur MISE EN GARDE Certains PC ne sont pas disponibles mme sils sont conformes lenvironnement dexploitation. Selon lenvironnement dutilisation etc. de votre PC, les descriptions et les crans dcrits dans ces Instructions dutilisation peuvent tre diffrents des descriptions et cran rels. Veuillez en prendre note. Le contenu de ces Instructions dutilisation est sujet des modifications sans pravis. Toute reproduction du contenu des Instructions dutilisation en partie ou en totalit est strictement interdite sans autorisation. Les descriptions sur le mode dexcution de Windows dans ces Instructions dutilisation utilisent les procdures et les crans de Windows 10. Tool Manager est seulement disponible dans le systme dexploitation compatible. Le fonctionnement nest pas garanti pour tous les PC conformes lenvironnement recommand. Windows 3.1, Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows NT et Windows 2000 ne sont supports. Le fonctionnement nest pas garanti pour Windows XP Media Center Edition, Tablet PC Edition, Windows Vista Enterprise et Windows 7 Enterprise. Le fonctionnement nest pas garanti pour les systmes dexploitation 64 bits de Windows XP et Windows Vista. Le fonctionnement nest pas garanti en mode XP de Windows 7. Le fonctionnement nest pas garanti pour les systmes dexploitation dans lenvironnement mis niveau. Lenvironnement dmarrage multiple nest pas support. Lenvironnement multi-moniteur nest pas support. Seulement lutilisateur ayant des privilges dadministrateur systme (Administrateur) est autoris effectuer linstallation et la dsinstallation. Avant lutilisation, connectez-vous avec le nom dutilisateur ayant un compte administrateur ou un compte utilisateur standard. Le nom dutilisateur avec compte invit ne peut pas lutiliser. Le fonctionnement nest pas garanti dans un environnement o vous avez chang la langue en utilisant la fonction dinterface utilisateur multilingue (MUI) de Windows Vista ou Windows 7 Ultimate. Microsoft et Windows sont des marques dposes ou des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation aux tats-Unis et/ou dautres pays. IBM et PC/AT sont des marques dposes de International Business Machines Corporation. Apple, Apple logos, Macintosh et MacOS sont des marques dposes de Apple Inc. Intel, Pentium et Celeron sont des marques dposes ou des marques commerciales de Intel Corporation aux tats-Unis et/ou dautres pays. Les captures dcran sont utilises en conformit avec les directives de Microsoft Corporation. Les autres noms, les noms de socit et les noms de produit mentionns dans le prsent document sont des marques commerciales ou des marques dposes de leur socit respective.

- 207 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 310 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 310 2023/11/28 14:24:08 2023/11/28 14:24:08 FR 3.2 SPCIFICATIONS DU LOGICIEL TOOL MANAGER propos du traitement (veuillez lire attentivement)

<Limitations>

Le logiciel Tool Manager sert configurer divers rglages de EYFMH1/EYFMH2. MISE EN GARDE Notez les points suivants lors de lutilisation du logiciel. Son utilisation implique lacceptation des

[Conditions dutilisation] qui se trouvent droite.

[Conditions dutilisation]

Ce logiciel ne comporte aucune garantie quelle quelle soit. Nous nassumons aucune responsabilit pour les dommages directs, les dommages indirects, les dommages graves, les dommages conscutifs ou les dommages spciaux de toute sorte, rsultant de lutilisation ou de lexploitation de ce logiciel. Il est strictement interdit de reproduire ou de distribuer ce logiciel.

- 208 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 311 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 311 2023/11/28 14:24:08 2023/11/28 14:24:08 FR 3.3 APPARIEMENT AVEC LE CONTRLEUR Activation de lappariement Utilisez la touche dappariement sur lunit de contrleur (EYFRW2). Slectionnez le tmoin de communication du numro sans enregistrement (tmoin teint) et maintenez la touche dappariement enfonce pour entrer en mode dappariement. Pendant deux minutes en mode dappariement, dmarrez le mode dappariement sur un outil dans la zone de couverture pour tablir automatiquement lappariement. Si lappariement nest pas tabli dans le dlai, le mode dappariement se termine. Aprs avoir essay de dmarrer lappariement, le contrleur peut prendre un certain temps avant de passer en mode dappariement. Tmoin de communication Touche dappariement Pour enregistrer loutil N 4 1 Appuyez 4 fois sur la touche dappariement du contrleur pour slectionner loutil N 4. Le tmoin de communication N 4 clignote. Pas denregistrement

(teint) Slectionn

(clignotement) 2 Lorsque le N 4 est slectionn, maintenez enfonce la touche dappariement sur le contrleur pour entrer en mode dappariement de loutil N 4. En mode dappariement, le tmoin de communication N 4 commence clignoter rapidement. Slectionn

(clignotement) Mode dappariement

(clignotement rapide)

- 209 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 312 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 312 2023/11/28 14:24:08 2023/11/28 14:24:08 FR 3.3 APPARIEMENT AVEC LE CONTRLEUR 3 Placez la batterie autonome dans loutil et tout en maintenant enfonc le bouton Marche/Arrt de la lumire DEL, tirez sur le commutateur gchette. Loutil entre en mode dappariement. Commutateur gchette Bouton Marche/Arrt de la lumire DEL Lorsque loutil entre en mode dappariement, laffichage sur le panneau de commande indique le mode dappariement. Affichage La communication sans fil est automatiquement tablie et lenregistrement dappariement est termin. Lorsque lenregistrement de lappariement est termin, le tmoin de communication N 4 sur le contrleur reste allum. Si lappariement choue, annulez lappariement sur le contrleur, puis ressayez. Mode dappariement

(clignotement rapide) Enregistr

(activ) Remarque Vous pouvez activer lappariement en rglant dans lcran de configuration en plus de lutilisation de la touche sur lappareil. Pour savoir comment activer lappariement dans lcran de configuration et plus de dtails sur le fonctionnement du contrleur, voir les Instructions dutilisation fournies avec le contrleur.

- 210 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 313 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 313 2023/11/28 14:24:08 2023/11/28 14:24:08 FR 3.3 APPARIEMENT AVEC LE CONTRLEUR Annuler lappariement Utilisez la touche dappariement sur lunit de contrleur (EYFRW2). Slectionnez le tmoin de communication du numro doutil dont vous voulez annuler lenregistrement (tmoin allum) et maintenez la touche dappariement enfonce pour annuler lenregistrement dappariement. Tmoin de communication Touche dappariement Pour annuler loutil N 4 1 Appuyez 4 fois sur la touche dappariement du contrleur pour slectionner loutil N 4. Le tmoin de communication N 4 clignote. Enregistr

(activ) Slectionn

(clignotement) 2 Lorsque le N 4 est slectionn, maintenez enfonce la touche dappariement sur le contrleur pour annuler lenregistrement dappariement de loutil N 4. Lorsque lappariement est annul, le tmoin de communication N 4 cesse de clignoter et steint. Slectionn

(clignotement) Pas denregistrement

(teint) Remarque Vous pouvez annuler lappariement en rglant dans lcran de configuration en plus dutiliser la touche sur lappareil. Pour savoir comment annuler lappariement dans lcran de configuration et plus de dtails sur le fonctionnement du contrleur, voir les Instructions dutilisation fournies avec le contrleur.

- 211 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 314 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 314 2023/11/28 14:24:08 2023/11/28 14:24:08 FR 3.4 PRCAUTIONS POUR LA COMMUNICATION SANS FIL Mises en garde pour lutilisation dun priphrique WLAN Lappareil utilise une bande de frquence partage avec dautres types dquipement incluant des appareils industriels, scientifiques et mdicaux (par ex. un four micro-

ondes) et des stations de radio telles quune station de radio amateur (sous licence) et une station radio de faible puissance (sans licence) pour lidentification mobile utilise dans les lignes de fabrication dusine et une station de radio amateur (sous licence). 1. Avant dutiliser lappareil, vrifiez quil ny a aucune station de radio faible puissance pour lidentification mobile ou quaucune station de radio amateur ne fonctionne proximit. 2. Si lappareil provoque des interfrences nuisibles avec une station de radio locale pour lidentification mobile, cessez immdiatement dutiliser la bande et consultez le centre dassistance ci-dessous pour rsoudre le problme dinterfrence (par exemple, en installant une cloison). 3. Si lappareil cause des interfrences nuisibles avec une station de radio faible puissance ou proximit pour lidentification mobile ou une station de radio amateur ou dautres problmes, consultez le centre dassistance. Il se peut quil y ait du bruit, une couverture radio plus courte ou un dysfonctionnement dans les conditions environnementales suivantes. Il y a une obstruction (par exemple un objet en mtal ou en bton arm) qui empche la propagation radio rgulire entre lunit doutils sans fil et le contrleur. Les antennes du contrleur sont recouvertes de mtal. Le corps dun oprateur interfre avec la propagation radio entre un oprateur (lunit doutil sans fil) et le contrleur. Un appareil micro-ondes, un PC ou tout autre appareil causant du bruit se trouve proximit. Un tlphone portable ou un tlphone PHS est utilis proximit de loutil sans fil et du contrleur. Avertissement de la FCC : afin dassurer la continuit de la conformit, installez et utilisez selon les instructions donnes. Utilisez seulement les blocs batteries spcifis dans les instructions. Tout changement ou modification non expressment approuv par les parties responsables de la conformit pourraient faire perdre lutilisateur le droit de faire fonctionner cet quipement. ID FCC: ACJ-EYFMH IC: ACJ-EYFMH Cet appareil est conforme au chapitre 15 du rglement de la FCC. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne peut pas provoquer de brouillage prjudiciable et (2) cet appareil doit pouvoir accepter nimporte quel brouillage reu incluant ceux qui pourraient provoquer un fonctionnement non dsir. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radioexempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) lappareil nedoit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillageradiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement.

- 212 -

2023/11/28 14:24:08 2023/11/28 14:24:08 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 315 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 315 FR 4.1 NETTOYAGE ET STOCKAGE Comment nettoyer Essuyer avec un chiffon doux Nutilisez pas de chiffon mouill, dalcool, de benzne ou dautres liquides volatiles.

(Cause de dcoloration, dformation ou fissure) Pour une longue dure de vie Faire effectuer priodiquement un entretien par le revendeur ou notre service de consultation. Retirer les corps trangers du sige de batterie autonome sur le chargeur de batterie Retirez la fiche dalimentation de la prise. Sige de batterie autonome au lithium-ion Maintenez le cache vers le bas pour exposer les connecteurs dans les sections et .

: Retirez les corps trangers avec une brosse ou objet similaire, tout en faisant attention de ne pas forcer les connecteurs.

: Retirez les corps trangers avec un chiffon ou similaire. Comment stocker vitez les conditions suivantes durant le stockage. Cabine automobile ou autres endroits chauds Endroits exposs la lumire directe du soleil Endroits exposs leau ou lhumidit Endroits avec beaucoup de corps trangers ou de poussire Endroits porte des enfants Endroits contenant de lessence ou autres produits inflammables

- 213 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 316 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 316 2023/11/28 14:24:09 2023/11/28 14:24:09 FR 4.2 BATTERIE AUTONOME DANGER Utilisez-les pour nos outils de charge et nos outils de charge agrs seulement. Nutilisez pas de batteries autonomes rechargeables autres que celles destines nos outils de charge seulement. Nutilisez pas de batterie autonome modifie (incluant toute batterie autonome avec ses pices internes remplaces aprs le dmontage). Ne mettez pas une batterie autonome au feu et ne la chauffez pas. Sinon, elle risque de gnrer de la chaleur, de senflammer ou dexploser. Aprs le retrait dune batterie autonome de loutil ou du chargeur de batterie, veillez fixer le cache dessus. Si le cache nest pas fix, cela peut provoquer un court-circuit des connecteurs de batterie et ils peuvent senflammer. Pour une longue dure de vie Aprs lutilisation dune batterie autonome au lithium-ion, entreposez-

la sans la charger. Lorsquelle nest pas utilise, mettez une protection dessus pour empcher la pntration de poussire et un court-circuit. Retirez les corps trangers prsents sur les connecteurs. Dure de vie dune batterie autonome Le produit est arriv sa fin de vie lorsque sa performance est rduite de moiti environ par rapport sa performance initiale lorsquil est compltement charg. Achetez une batterie autonome pour nos outils de charge seulement. Nous nassumons aucune responsabilit pour les accidents ou pannes de toute sorte rsultant de lutilisation de batteries autonomes autres que celles spcifies par nous. AVERTISSEMENT Nutilisez pas de batterie autonome recycle dont seulement sa batterie de stockage interne est remplace. Sinon, cela peut causer un accident ou une panne. propos du recyclage Attention La batterie Li-ion que vous vous tes procure est recyclable. Pour des renseignements sur le recyclage de la batterie, veuillez composer le 1-800-8-BATTERY. Lorsque la batterie autonome nest pas utilise Avant lentreposage Entreposer sans charger Avant la rutilisation Pleine charge

- 214 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 317 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 317 2023/11/28 14:24:09 2023/11/28 14:24:09 FR 4.2 BATTERIE AUTONOME

- 215 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 318 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 318 2023/11/28 14:24:10 2023/11/28 14:24:10 FR 4.3 CODES DERREUR 4.3.1 CODES DERREUR SUR LE PANNEAU DE COMMANDE Si loutil ou la batterie autonome prsente une anomalie, un code derreur clignote sur le panneau de commande. Avant de demander une rparation, procdez comme suit. Envoyez-la pour rparation si aucune amlioration nest observe mme aprs laction suivante. Affichage Cause possible Action Anomalie dans la mmoire interne de loutil ou la ligne de communication, la communication sans fil, etc. La batterie autonome est chaude. Retirez et fixez la batterie autonome une fois, puis redmarrez loutil. Si le problme persiste, effectuez linitialisation.

(Lorsque E1 est affich, maintenez la touche DEL enfonce pendant environ 10 secondes.) En mode de communication sans fil, vrifiez aussi ltat du contrleur. Interrompez le travail et remplacez la batterie autonome, ou attendez que la temprature de la batterie autonome baisse avant lutilisation. Le moteur de loutil est chaud. Interrompez le travail et attendez que la temprature du moteur baisse avant lutilisation. Il y a une anomalie dans les connecteurs entre loutil et la batterie autonome Vrifiez sil y a des corps trangers ou des traces dusure dans les connecteurs. Ou remplacez la batterie autonome. Surcharge, panne du moteur, etc. Vrifiez si le travail convient la capacit de loutil. Erreur de communication USB avec le logiciel Tool Manager Rupture du cble USB, bruit externe Vrifiez la connexion du cble USB. Remplacez le cble USB. Changez le lieu de travail. Anomalie, panne, etc. dans le circuit de loutil Erreur de communication sans fil avec le contrleur La fonction de limitation de la plage de fonctionnement est active (uniquement lors de lutilisation de EYFRW2) Anomalie, panne, etc. dans le capteur de couple Temps de travail excessif (donnes de mesure excessives) Estim NOK La batterie bouton lintrieur de loutil est dcharge. Charge de travail par lot excessive en mode

[Wireless Communication Mode]

(Excdent de capacit de mmoire stockant temporairement les donnes de communication) Redmarrez loutil et le contrleur. Vrifiez la communication, avec un autre outil normal. Si lerreur persiste, contactez le fabricant du contrleur. Retirez puis rglez la batterie autonome dans la zone de couverture sans fil avant de lutiliser nouveau. Si le problme persiste aprs le retrait et la mise en place de la batterie autonome, vrifiez le contrleur et les priphriques.

: Tirez linterrupteur gchette et redmarrez loutil.

: Travaillez de nouveau en mode [Stand Alone Mode], et vrifiez la description de lerreur dans le journal dhistorique. Examinez les paramtres configurs. Examinez la charge de travail dans un lot. Slectionnez un rglage autre que [After Batch Complete]

pour rgler [Graph Sending/Storing Timing]. MISE EN GARDE La protection contre la surcharge (E5) peut fonctionner si vous serrez ou desserrez le boulon qui a t serr.

- 216 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 319 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 319 2023/11/28 14:24:10 2023/11/28 14:24:10 FR 4.3 CODES DERREUR 4.3.2 MESSAGES DERREUR DES JOURNAUX DHISTORIQUE Si le travail de serrage nest pas bien effectu, vous pouvez vrifier la description derreur dans le journal dhistorique affich dans le logiciel Tool Manager. (Pour savoir comment consulter les journaux dhistorique, Se reporter 2.2.12 .) Catgorie Message derreur Cause 1 Torque Torque exceeded 2 Torque Torque insufficient Le couple mesur de loutil a excd le rglage de couple de limite suprieure. Les conditions de la pice ne conviennent pas pour loutil. Le couple mesur de loutil lors de larrt du travail est infrieur au couple de limite infrieure. Les conditions de la pice ne conviennent pas pour loutil. 3 Angle Before snug angle exceeded Langle avant lajustement au milieu du travail a excd le rglage de limite suprieure. 4 Angle Before snug angle insufficient Langle avant lajustement lors de larrt du travail est infrieur au rglage de limite infrieure. 5 Angle After snug angle exceeded Langle aprs lajustement au milieu du travail a excd le rglage de limite suprieure. 6 Angle After snug angle insufficient Langle aprs lajustement lors de larrt du travail est infrieur au rglage de limite infrieure. 7 Error Rundown error Un arrt a t effectu lors du rglage du temps derreur. Action

(pour cause involontaire) Vrifiez les rglages. Examinez les conditions de la pice. Dsactivez le rglage de couple de limite suprieure. Vrifiez les rglages. Examinez les conditions de la pice. Dsactivez le rglage de couple de limite infrieure. Vrifiez les rglages (incluant le rglage du point dajustement). Examinez les conditions de la pice. Dsactivez le rglage de limite suprieure. Vrifiez les rglages (incluant le rglage du point dajustement). Examinez les conditions de la pice. Dsactivez le rglage de limite infrieure. Vrifiez les rglages (incluant le rglage du point dajustement). Examinez les conditions de la pice. Dsactivez le rglage de limite suprieure. Vrifiez les rglages (incluant le rglage du point dajustement). Examinez les conditions de la pice. Dsactivez le rglage de limite infrieure. Vrifiez les rglages (couple darrt et rglage de temps derreur). Examinez les conditions de la pice. (Larrt peut tre caus par une charge anormale.) Dsactivez le rglage derreur dexcution.

- 217 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 320 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 320 2023/11/28 14:24:10 2023/11/28 14:24:10 FR 4.3 CODES DERREUR 4.3.2 MESSAGES DERREUR DES JOURNAUX DHISTORIQUE Catgorie Message derreur Cause 8 Error Stop before shut off 9 Error Shut off incomplete 10 Error Overcurrent 11 Error Low voltage Le travail sest termin avant larrt. Lutilisateur a dsactiv la gchette. Larrt a t caus par une autre erreur. Le travail sest arrt cause de arrt avant extinction et occurrence dimpulsions . Arrt avant extinction Le travail a dmarr. La protection sest arrte car un courant anormal a t observ dans loutil. Dpend de lenvironnement de travail Dpend de la batterie ou de loutil La protection sest arrte car une tension anormale a t observe dans la batterie. Dpend de lenvironnement de travail Dpend de la batterie ou de loutil 12 Error Motor high temperature La protection sest arrte parce que le moteur de loutil est chaud. Action

(pour cause involontaire)

<Si un arrt manuel a t effectu>

Examinez lenvironnement de travail. Vrifiez les conditions de la pice.

<Si une autre erreur apparat>

Vrifiez la description derreur et prenez une action. Se reporter la section sur larrt avant lextinction. Examinez la procdure de travail. Examinez lenvironnement de travail (sil y a une charge anormale et comment les ouvriers utilisent loutil). Examinez la batterie autonome

(charger ou remplacer par une nouvelle batterie). Nettoyez les connecteurs

(vrifiez la prsence de poussire et de traces dusure dans les connecteurs). Attendez quil refroidisse avant lutilisation (sans condensation).

< Sil y a des charges anormales continues>

Examinez lenvironnement de travail. Vrifiez les conditions de la pice. Attendez quelle refroidisse avant lutilisation. 13 Error Battery high temperature La protection sest arrte

< Sil y a des charges anormales parce que la batterie autonome est chaude. continues>

Examinez lenvironnement de 14 Error Battery sensor error Une anomalie a t observe autour des connecteurs de la batterie autonome de loutil. travail. Vrifiez les conditions de la pice. Mettez la batterie autonome de nouveau en place. Examinez la batterie autonome

(charger ou remplacer par une nouvelle batterie). Nettoyez les connecteurs

(vrifiez la prsence de poussire et de traces dusure dans les connecteurs).

- 218 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 321 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 321 2023/11/28 14:24:10 2023/11/28 14:24:10 FR 4.3 CODES DERREUR 4.3.2 MESSAGES DERREUR DES JOURNAUX DHISTORIQUE Catgorie Message derreur Cause 15 Error Motor sensor error Le capteur de temprature du moteur a dtect une erreur de temprature basse. Critres : -30 C ou en dessous Action

(pour cause involontaire) Examinez lenvironnement de travail. Si cela se produit frquemment, il y a une panne, car lestimation est base sur la temprature seulement. 16 Error Torque sensor error Une rupture ou un court-circuit a t dtect autour du capteur de couple. Vrifiez la frquence. Faites rparer si cela se produit frquemment. 17 Error Torque sensor protection 18 Error Tool locked Dans une tche unique, lun des lments suivants a excd la limite suprieure mesurable. Nombre dimpulsions

(= 511 fois) Temps de travail

(= 13 secondes) Angle cumul

(= 131071) Aprs lactivation de la gchette, le moteur ne dmarre pas. Panne matrielle, charge anormale, etc. 19 Error Circuit identification error Le rglage de linterrupteur didentification du circuit de loutil est inacceptable. 20 Error Parameter error Les paramtres dfinis dans loutil sont hors de la plage de rglage. 21 Error Data limit exceeded La quantit de donnes enregistrables par travail a t atteinte. 22 Error Maintenance warning Le temps dimpulsions cumul a encore 1 heure de dlai avant le rappel. 23 Error Maintenance protection Le temps dimpulsions cumul a excd le rglage du rappel. Examinez lenvironnement de travail (incluant le travail et la procdure). Vrifiez les conditions de la pice. Examinez lenvironnement de travail. Vrifiez la frquence. Faites rparer si cela se produit frquemment. Vrifiez la frquence. Faites rparer si cela se produit frquemment. (Panne de circuit ou erreur de fabrication ou rparation) Vrifiez les rglages des paramtres. Configurez de nouveau les paramtres de loutil. Examinez lenvironnement de travail (incluant le travail et la procdure). Vrifiez les conditions de la pice. Vrifiez le rglage. Effectuez le rglage de nouveau

(tel que lextension, linitialisation ou la dsactivation du rglage). Vrifiez le rglage. Effectuez le rglage de nouveau (tel que lextension, linitialisation ou la dsactivation du rglage).

- 219 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 322 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 322 2023/11/28 14:24:10 2023/11/28 14:24:10 FR 4.4 CONDITIONS DE LICENCE Conditions de licence du logiciel Ce produit comprend les types de logiciels suivants.

(1) Logiciel dvelopp indpendamment par Panasonic Corporation (Panasonic)

(2) Logiciel dtenu par un tiers et sous licence de Panasonic

(3) Logiciel libre Le logiciel de la catgorie (3) ci-dessus est distribu dans lattente dune utilisation autonome ;

cependant, nous noffrons aucune garantie daucune sorte, y compris de fournir une garantie implicite de qualit marchande ou de convenance un usage particulier . Reportez-vous la section ci-dessous pour obtenir des informations sur les dtenteurs des droits dauteur et des dtails sur les licences. Informations relatives aux dtenteurs des droits dauteur Copyright (c) 2009-2019 Arm Limited. Copyright (c) 2018-2019 Arm Limited. Copyright (c) 2009-2018 Arm Limited. Copyright (c) 2017-2019 IAR Systems Copyright (c) 2017-2019 Arm Limited. Copyright (c) 2018 Arm Limited. Copyright (c) 2017-2019 Arm Limited. Copyright (c) 2017-2018 Arm Limited. Copyright (c) 2013-2019 ARM Limited. Copyright (c) 2013-2020 Arm Limited. Copyright (C) 2006-2018, Arm Limited (or its affiliates) Copyright (C) 2006-2015, ARM Limited Copyright (C) 2006-2018, ARM Limited Copyright (C) 2015-2018, Arm Limited (or its affiliates) Copyright (C) 2016, ARM Limited Copyright (C) 2006-2016, ARM Limited Copyright (C) 2016-2018, ARM Limited Copyright (C) 2018, Arm Limited (or its affiliates) Copyright (C) 2018, Arm Limited Copyright (C) 2006-2017, ARM Limited Copyright (c) 2019 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics International N.V. Copyright (c) 2013-2017 ARM Limited. Copyright (C) 2017 Texas Instruments Incorporated Copyright (c) 2017-2018, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2017, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2017-2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2018, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2015-2018, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2015-2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved.

- 220 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 323 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 323 2023/11/28 14:24:10 2023/11/28 14:24:10 FR 4.4 CONDITIONS DE LICENCE Copyright (c) 2012-2018 Texas Instruments Incorporated Copyright (c) 2012-2019 Texas Instruments Incorporated Copyright (c) 2016-2018 Texas Instruments Incorporated Copyright (c) 2014-2018, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (C) 2016-2018, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (C) 2016-2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (C) 2016-2020, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2019, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2017-2020, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2013-2018, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2021 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2019 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. COPYRIGHT(c) 2017 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2018 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. Copyright (c) 2020 STMicroelectronics.All rights reserved. Copyright (C) 2017 Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates. Copyright (C) 2019 StMicroelectronics, Inc. Copyright (C) 2020 Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates. Licences Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004 http://www.apache.org/licenses/

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION 1. Definitions. License shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. Licensor shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License. Legal Entity shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, control means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity. You (or Your) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.

- 221-

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 324 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 324 2023/11/28 14:24:10 2023/11/28 14:24:10 FR 4.4 CONDITIONS DE LICENCE Source form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files. Object form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types. Work shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work

(an example is provided in the Appendix below). Derivative Works shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof. Contribution shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, submitted means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as Not a Contribution. Contributor shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work. 2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form. 3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable

- 222 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 325 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 325 2023/11/28 14:24:10 2023/11/28 14:24:10 FR 4.4 CONDITIONS DE LICENCE

(except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed. 4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:

(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and

(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and

(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and

(d) If the Work includes a NOTICE text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License. You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or

- 223 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 326 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 326 2023/11/28 14:24:10 2023/11/28 14:24:10 FR 4.4 CONDITIONS DE LICENCE for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License. 5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions. 6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file. 7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an AS IS BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License. 8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages. 9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

- 224 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 327 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 327 2023/11/28 14:24:10 2023/11/28 14:24:10 FR 4.4 CONDITIONS DE LICENCE END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work. To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets {}

replaced with your own identifying information. (Dont include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same printed page as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party archives. Copyright {yyyy} {name of copyright owner}

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the License);

you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.

Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004 http://www.apache.org/licenses/

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION 1. Definitions. License shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document. Licensor shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License. Legal Entity shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, control means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

- 225 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 328 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 328 2023/11/28 14:24:10 2023/11/28 14:24:10 FR 4.4 CONDITIONS DE LICENCE You (or Your) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License. Source form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files. Object form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types. Work shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work

(an example is provided in the Appendix below). Derivative Works shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof. Contribution shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, submitted means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as Not a Contribution. Contributor shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work. 2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

- 226 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 329 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 329 2023/11/28 14:24:10 2023/11/28 14:24:10 FR 4.4 CONDITIONS DE LICENCE 3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable

(except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed. 4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:

(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and

(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and

(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and

(d) If the Work includes a NOTICE text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.

- 227 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 330 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 330 2023/11/28 14:24:10 2023/11/28 14:24:10 FR 4.4 CONDITIONS DE LICENCE You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License. 5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions. 6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file. 7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an AS IS BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License. 8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages. 9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability

- 228 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 331 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 331 2023/11/28 14:24:10 2023/11/28 14:24:10 FR 4.4 CONDITIONS DE LICENCE incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work. To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets []

replaced with your own identifying information. (Dont include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same printed page as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party archives. Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the License);

you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.

# Copyright (c) 2017 STMicroelectronics This software component is licensed by STMicroelectronics under the **BSD 3-Clause** license. You may not use this file except in compliance with this license. You may obtain a copy of the license [here]

(https://opensource.org/licenses/BSD-3-Clause). Copyright <YEAR> <COPYRIGHT HOLDER>

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list

- 229 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 332 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 332 2023/11/28 14:24:10 2023/11/28 14:24:10 FR 4.4 CONDITIONS DE LICENCE of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Copyright (c) 2017, Texas Instruments Incorporated All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* Neither the name of Texas Instruments Incorporated nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;

OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

- 230 -

Suite la page suivante EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 333 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 333 2023/11/28 14:24:11 2023/11/28 14:24:11 FR 4.4 CONDITIONS DE LICENCE

The FreeRTOS kernel is released under the MIT open source license, the text of which is provided below. This license covers the FreeRTOS kernel source files, which are located in the

/FreeRTOS/Source directory of the official FreeRTOS kernel download. It also covers most of the source files in the demo application projects, which are located in the /FreeRTOS/Demo directory of the official FreeRTOS download. The demo projects may also include third party software that is not part of FreeRTOS and is licensed separately to FreeRTOS. Examples of third party software includes header files provided by chip or tools vendors, linker scripts, peripheral drivers, etc. All the software in subdirectories of the /FreeRTOS directory is either open source or distributed with permission, and is free for use. For the avoidance of doubt, refer to the comments at the top of each source file. License text:

Copyright (C) 2019 Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the Software), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

- 231 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 334 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 334 2023/11/28 14:24:11 2023/11/28 14:24:11 FR- 232 -

EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 557 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 557 2023/11/28 14:24:40 2023/11/28 14:24:40 The operating instructions (full version) download site Le site de tlchargement des instructions dutilisation (version complte) El sitio de descarga del manual de instrucciones (versin completa) The United States and Mexico:

Pour les tats-Unis et le Mexique :

Estados Unidos y Mxico:

https://na.panasonic.com/us/support/assembly-tools-owners-manuals Canada:

Canada :

Canad:

https://na.panasonic.com/ca/support/assembly-tools-owners-manuals The Tool Manager software download site Site de tlchargement du logiciel Tool Manager El sitio de descarga del software Tool Manager The United States and Mexico:

Pour les tats-Unis et le Mexique :

Estados Unidos y Mxico:

https://na.panasonic.com/us/support/assembly-tools-downloads Canada:

Canada :

Canad:

https://na.panasonic.com/ca/support/assembly-tools-downloads Panasonic Eco Systems North America Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102 Panasonic Canada Inc. 5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 2T3 www.panasonic.ca EN. FR. ES. EY9813FMH101 20240110 S EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 558 EYFMH1WC_H2WC_WEB_EU.indb 558 2023/11/28 14:24:40 2023/11/28 14:24:40

no:max.2300min-1 14.4 V Battery Operated Tool / Herramienta con pilas Model / Modelo : EYFMH1WC Made in Japan /

Hecho en Japn Panasonic Corporation Osaka, Japan no:max.2300min-1 14.4 V Battery Operated Tool / Herramienta con pilas Model / Modelo : EYFMH2WC Made in Japan /

Hecho en Japn Panasonic Corporation Osaka, Japan no:max.2300min-1 14.4 V Battery Operated Tool / Herramienta con pilas Model / Modelo : EYFMH1WP Made in Japan /

Hecho en Japn Panasonic Corporation Osaka, Japan no:max.2300min-1 14.4 V Battery Operated Tool / Herramienta con pilas Model / Modelo : EYFMH2WP Made in Japan /

Hecho en Japn Panasonic Corporation Osaka, Japan FCC ID: ACJ-EYFMH IC: 216A-EYFMH For USA, Canada EYFMH1WC, EYFMH1WP EYFMH2WC, EYFMH2WP

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/7086608.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case Ben Botros, Manager Regulatory & Compliance Panasonic Corporation of North America Agent Authorization Letter January 9, 2024 ESPT-23-1148 American Certification Body, Inc. 313 Park Avenue, Suite 300, Falls Church, VA 22046 Re: Original Application for Panasonic Impact Wrench, Models:

EYFMH1WP, EYFMH1WC, EYFMH2WP, EYFMH2WC under FCC ID: ACJ-EYFMH To whom it may concern:

The undersigned hereby authorize Intertek Testing Service Shanghai to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by Intertek Testing Service Shanghai on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. The undersigned hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 853(a). Further, no party as defined in 47 CFR 1.2002 (b), to the applicant is subject to denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits. We also declare that the information provided to the FCC is true and correct to the best of our knowledge

(47 CFR 2.911(d)) and we have been informed of the grantee responsibilities (47 CFR 2.909) with regard to certified equipment. In authorizing Intertek Testing Service Shanghai as our agent, we still recognize that we are responsible to:

a) comply with the relevant provisions of the certification program;

make all necessary arrangements for the conduct of the evaluation, including provision for b) examining documentation and access to all areas, records (including internal audit reports) and personnel for the purposes of evaluation (e.g. testing, inspection, assessment, surveillance, reassessment) and resolution of complaints;

make claims regarding certification only in respect of the scope for which certification has been c) granted;

do not use our product certification in such a manner as to bring the Certification Division into d) disrepute and not make any statement regarding our product certification which the Certification Division may consider misleading or unauthorized;

upon suspension or cancellation of certification, discontinue use of all advertising matter that e) contains any reference thereto and return any certification documents as required by the Certification Division;

Panasonic Corporation of North America Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490 Tel/Fax: 201-348-7760 / Ben.Botros@us.panasonic.com Ben Botros, Manager Regulatory & Compliance Panasonic Corporation of North America use certification only to indicate the products are certified as being in conformity with specified f) standards;

g) endeavor to ensure that no certificate or report nor any part thereof is used in a misleading manner;

h) ensure that any reference to our product certification in communication media such as documents, brochures or advertising, complies with the requirements of the Certification Division;

keep a record of all complaints made known to the us relating to the products compliance with i) requirements of the relevant standard and to make these records available to the Certification Division when requested;

take appropriate action with respect to such complaints and any deficiencies found in products or j) services that affect compliance with the requirements for certification;

k) document the actions taken. This authorization is for Single Limited Modular approval, Model EYFMH1WP, EYFMH1WC, EYFMH2WP, EYFMH2WC under FCC ID: ACJ-EYFMH and is valid for a six (6) month period from the date of this letter. Thank you for your attention in this matter. Sincerely, Ben Botros Manager Regulatory and Compliance Panasonic Corporation of North America Panasonic Corporation of North America Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490 Tel/Fax: 201-348-7760 / Ben.Botros@us.panasonic.com

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/7086609.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case Covered Equipment CFR 47 2.911 (d)(5) Attestation January 9, 2024 ESPT-23-1148 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Standards Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 USA Subject: FCC ID: ACJ-EYFMH To whom it may concern:

Panasonic Corporation of North America certifies that the equipment for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment prohibited from receiving an equipment authorization pursuant to section 2.903 of the FCC rules. Panasonic Corporation of North America certifies that, as of the date of the filing of the application, the applicant is not identified on the Covered List as an entity producing covered equipment. Sincerely, Ben Botros Manager Regulatory & Compliance Panasonic Corporation of North America

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/6970202.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case Ben Botros Manager Regulatory Compliance Panasonic Corporation of North America Agent Designation Attestation CFR 47 2.911 (d)(7) Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Standards Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 USA Date: September 6, 2023 Subject: FRN 0003762242 with FCC Grantee Code ACJ - Attestation Statements Part 2.911(d)(7) Panasonic Corporation of North America (the applicant) certifies that, Panasonic Corporation of North America is our designated U.S. agent for service of process for the above referenced FCC Grantee Code ACJ. Panasonic Corporation of North America accepts to maintain an agent for no less than one year after the grantee has terminated all marketing and importation or the conclusion of any Commission-related proceeding involving the equipment. Panasonic Corporation of North America accepts, as of the date of the filing of the application, the obligation of the designated U.S. agent for service of process for Grantee Code ACJ. Designated U.S. Agent Information:

Name: Panasonic Corporation of North America Address: Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, New Jersey, United States Contact Person: Ben Botros Tel.: 201-348-7760 Email: Ben.Botros@us.panasonic.com This agreement applies to all products applied by Panasonic Corporation of North America for FCC Grantee Code ACJ and is valid within the product life. Sincerely, Ben Botros Manager Regulatory & Compliance Panasonic Corporation of North America FRN 0003762242 Panasonic Corporation of North America Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490 Tel: 201-348-7760 / Ben.Botros@us.panasonic.com

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/7086611.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case Ben Botros, Manager Regulatory & Compliance Panasonic Corporation of North America Request for Permanent Confidentiality January 9, 2024 ESPT-23-1148 American Certification Body, Inc. 313 Park Avenue, Suite 300, Falls Church, VA 22046 Re: Original System Application for Panasonic Impact Wrench, Models:

EYFMH1WP, EYFMH1WC, EYFMH2WP, EYFMH2WC under FCC ID: ACJ-EYFMH To whom it may concern:

Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as permanent confidential documents from public disclosure. Theory of Operation Block Diagram Schematics Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. Thank you for your attention in this matter. Sincerely, Ben Botros Manager Regulatory and Compliance Panasonic Corporation of North America Panasonic Corporation of North America Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490 Tel/Fax: 201-348-7760 / Ben.Botros@us.panasonic.com

WARNING:pdfminer.pdfpage:The PDF <_io.BufferedReader name='/Volumes/Scratch/Incoming/eg-scratch/7088644.pdf'> contains a metadata field indicating that it should not allow text extraction. Ignoring this field and proceeding. Use the check_extractable if you want to raise an error in this case Ben Botros, Manager Regulatory & Compliance Panasonic Corporation of North America Wi-Fi Channel Declaration Letter January 9, 2024 ESPT-23-1148 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Standards Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 USA Re: Original System Application for Panasonic Impact Wrench, Models:

EYFMH1WP, EYFMH1WC, EYFMH2WP, EYFMH2WC under FCC ID: ACJ-EYFMH To whom it may concern:

Panasonic Corporation of North America declare that the subject products does not support channel 12 ~ 13 in the 2.4GHz band and any non-US channels in all the operational mode(s) for the following product sold in the USA. Only channels 1~11 will be used in USA. Country code selection is disabled and cannot be changed by user. Please contact me if you have any questions or need further information regarding this application. Sincerely, Ben Botros Manager Regulatory & Compliance Panasonic Corporation of North America Panasonic Corporation of North America Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490 Tel/Fax: 201-348-7760 / Ben.Botros@us.panasonic.com

Difference between each Model code 4 model codes of EYFMH*W* all have same wireless communication features for WLAN. The difference between model codes are Anvil type, Shut-off Torque range and Identification plate.

(See Table2-1). Table 2-1 Specification for each Model code